EP3596734A1 - Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé - Google Patents

Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé

Info

Publication number
EP3596734A1
EP3596734A1 EP19726205.8A EP19726205A EP3596734A1 EP 3596734 A1 EP3596734 A1 EP 3596734A1 EP 19726205 A EP19726205 A EP 19726205A EP 3596734 A1 EP3596734 A1 EP 3596734A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
electronic device
display
user
biometric information
detecting
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP19726205.8A
Other languages
German (de)
English (en)
Inventor
Christopher D. Soli
Matthew W. Crowley
Bradley W. Griffin
Gary BUTCHER
Roxanne BRITTAIN
Heather DANIEL
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Apple Inc
Original Assignee
Apple Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from DKPA201870602A external-priority patent/DK180246B1/en
Application filed by Apple Inc filed Critical Apple Inc
Priority to EP20180581.9A priority Critical patent/EP3734611A1/fr
Priority to EP22190169.7A priority patent/EP4109470A1/fr
Priority to EP20180592.6A priority patent/EP3734612B1/fr
Publication of EP3596734A1 publication Critical patent/EP3596734A1/fr
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H50/00—ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics
    • G16H50/30—ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics for calculating health indices; for individual health risk assessment
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00—Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06—Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44—Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/451—Execution arrangements for user interfaces
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H10/00—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data
    • G16H10/60—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data for patient-specific data, e.g. for electronic patient records
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H40/00—ICT specially adapted for the management or administration of healthcare resources or facilities; ICT specially adapted for the management or operation of medical equipment or devices
    • G16H40/60—ICT specially adapted for the management or administration of healthcare resources or facilities; ICT specially adapted for the management or operation of medical equipment or devices for the operation of medical equipment or devices
    • G16H40/63—ICT specially adapted for the management or administration of healthcare resources or facilities; ICT specially adapted for the management or operation of medical equipment or devices for the operation of medical equipment or devices for local operation
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H50/00—ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics
    • G16H50/20—ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics for computer-aided diagnosis, e.g. based on medical expert systems
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H70/00—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of medical references
    • G16H70/20—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of medical references relating to practices or guidelines

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more specifically to techniques for managing health monitoring.
  • Monitoring health such as heart health using heart rhythm and heart rate information
  • electronic devices is a convenient and effective method of providing and maintaining awareness of one’s health.
  • Using electronic devices enable a user to quickly and easily capture biometric information used to monitor the user’s health.
  • Some techniques for managing health monitoring using electronic devices are generally cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface, which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.
  • the present technique provides electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing health monitoring.
  • Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace other methods for managing health monitoring.
  • Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface.
  • For battery-operated computing devices such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
  • Such methods and interfaces enable a user to quickly and easily capture health information (thereby also incentivizing the user to frequently monitor his or her health) and to conveniently view and manage recorded health information (thereby raising awareness of the user’s current health status to the user).
  • a method performed at a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, wherein the first electronic device is paired with a second electronic device comprises: displaying, on the display, a first portion of a tutorial for using a function of the second electronic device; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to proceed with the tutorial; in response to detecting the request to proceed with the tutorial, displaying, on the display, instructions to perform an operation on the second electronic device that involves the function of the second electronic device; receiving, from the second electronic device, an indication that the instructions have been carried out; and in response to receiving the indication that the instructions have been carried out, displaying, on the display, a second portion of the tutorial that is different from the first portion.
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, wherein the first electronic device is paired with a second electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first portion of a tutorial for using a function of the second electronic device; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to proceed with the tutorial; in response to detecting the request to proceed with the tutorial, displaying, on the display, instructions to perform an operation on the second electronic device that involves the function of the second electronic device; receiving, from the second electronic device, an indication that the instructions have been carried out; and in response to receiving the indication that the instructions have been carried out, displaying, on the display, a second portion of the tutorial that is different from the first portion.
  • a transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, wherein the first electronic device is paired with a second electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for:
  • displaying, on the display, a first portion of a tutorial for using a function of the second electronic device detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to proceed with the tutorial; in response to detecting the request to proceed with the tutorial, displaying, on the display, instructions to perform an operation on the second electronic device that involves the function of the second electronic device; receiving, from the second electronic device, an indication that the instructions have been carried out; and in response to receiving the indication that the instructions have been carried out, displaying, on the display, a second portion of the tutorial that is different from the first portion.
  • a first electronic device is described.
  • the first electronic device wherein the first electronic device is paired with a second electronic device, comprises: a display, one or more input devices; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first portion of a tutorial for using a function of the second electronic device; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to proceed with the tutorial; in response to detecting the request to proceed with the tutorial, displaying, on the display, instructions to perform an operation on the second electronic device that involves the function of the second electronic device;
  • a first electronic device comprising: a display, one or more input devices; means for displaying, on the display, a first portion of a tutorial for using a function of the second electronic device; means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to proceed with the tutorial; means, in response to detecting the request to proceed with the tutorial, for displaying, on the display, instructions to perform an operation on the second electronic device that involves the function of the second electronic device; means for receiving, from the second electronic device, an indication that the instructions have been carried out; and means, in response to receiving the indication that the instructions have been carried out, for displaying, on the display, a second portion of the tutorial that is different from the first portion.
  • a method performed at a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices including a biometric sensor comprises: displaying, on the display, a first user interface indicating that the first electronic device is ready to detect biometric information; detecting a first input with the biometric sensor that satisfies first criteria; in response to detecting the first input with the biometric sensor: starting to record biometric information detected by the biometric sensor; and displaying, on the display, a second user interface that is different from the first user interface, wherein the second user interface includes an indication of progress in recording the biometric information; after recording at least a portion of the biometric information, detecting, via the one or more input devices, that the first criteria are no longer met; in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a first period of time, resetting the indication of progress in recording the biometric information and maintaining display of the second user interface; and in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a second period of
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices including a biometric sensor, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first user interface indicating that the first electronic device is ready to detect biometric information; detecting a first input with the biometric sensor that satisfies first criteria; in response to detecting the first input with the biometric sensor: starting to record biometric information detected by the biometric sensor; and displaying, on the display, a second user interface that is different from the first user interface, wherein the second user interface includes an indication of progress in recording the biometric information; after recording at least a portion of the biometric information, detecting, via the one or more input devices, that the first criteria are no longer met; in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a first period of time,
  • a transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices including a biometric sensor, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first user interface indicating that the first electronic device is ready to detect biometric information; detecting a first input with the biometric sensor that satisfies first criteria; in response to detecting the first input with the biometric sensor: starting to record biometric information detected by the biometric sensor; and displaying, on the display, a second user interface that is different from the first user interface, wherein the second user interface includes an indication of progress in recording the biometric information; after recording at least a portion of the biometric information, detecting, via the one or more input devices, that the first criteria are no longer met; in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a first period of time, resetting the indication
  • a first electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices including a biometric sensor; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a first user interface indicating that the first electronic device is ready to detect biometric information; detecting a first input with the biometric sensor that satisfies first criteria; in response to detecting the first input with the biometric sensor:
  • the second user interface includes an indication of progress in recording the biometric information; after recording at least a portion of the biometric information, detecting, via the one or more input devices, that the first criteria are no longer met; in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a first period of time, resetting the indication of progress in recording the biometric information and maintaining display of the second user interface; and in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a second period of time that is longer than the first period of time, replacing display of the second user interface with the first user interface.
  • a first electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices including a biometric sensor; means for displaying, on the display, a first user interface indicating that the first electronic device is ready to detect biometric information; means for detecting a first input with the biometric sensor that satisfies first criteria; means, in response to detecting the first input with the biometric sensor, for: starting to record biometric information detected by the biometric sensor; and displaying, on the display, a second user interface that is different from the first user interface, wherein the second user interface includes an indication of progress in recording the biometric information; means, after recording at least a portion of the biometric information, for detecting, via the one or more input devices, that the first criteria are no longer met; means, in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a first period of time, for resetting the indication of progress in recording the biometric information and maintaining display of the second user interface; and means, in response to detecting that
  • a method performed at a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices including a first input device with an integrated biometric sensor comprises: displaying, on the display, a user interface of an application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor; while displaying the user interface of the application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor, detecting a first activation of the first input device; in response to detecting the first activation of the first input device and while capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor: in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when first criteria are met, wherein the first criteria are based on progress toward capturing biometric information with the biometric sensor, performing a predefined operation associated with the first input device that interrupts capture of the biometric information; and in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when the first criteria are not met, continuing to capture the biometric information without performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device.
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices including a first input device with an integrated biometric sensor, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a user interface of an application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor; while displaying the user interface of the application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor, detecting a first activation of the first input device; in response to detecting the first activation of the first input device and while capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor: in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when first criteria are met, wherein the first criteria are based on progress toward capturing biometric information with the biometric sensor, performing a predefined operation associated with the first input device that interrupts capture of the biometric information; and in accordance with a
  • a transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices including a first input device with an integrated biometric sensor, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a user interface of an application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor; while displaying the user interface of the application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor, detecting a first activation of the first input device; in response to detecting the first activation of the first input device and while capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor: in accordance with a
  • the first criteria are based on progress toward capturing biometric information with the biometric sensor, performing a predefined operation associated with the first input device that interrupts capture of the biometric information; and in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when the first criteria are not met, continuing to capture the biometric information without performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device.
  • a first electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices including a first input device with an integrated biometric sensor; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a user interface of an application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor; while displaying the user interface of the application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor, detecting a first activation of the first input device; in response to detecting the first activation of the first input device and while capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor: in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when first criteria are met, wherein the first criteria are based on progress toward capturing biometric information with the biometric sensor, performing a predefined operation associated with the first input device that interrupts capture of the biometric information; and in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first
  • a first electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices including a first input device with an integrated biometric sensor; means for displaying, on the display, a user interface of an application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor; means, while displaying the user interface of the application for capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor, for detecting a first activation of the first input device; means, in response to detecting the first activation of the first input device and while capturing biometric information from the biometric sensor, for: in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when first criteria are met, wherein the first criteria are based on progress toward capturing biometric information with the biometric sensor, performing a predefined operation associated with the first input device that interrupts capture of the biometric information; and in accordance with a determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when the first criteria are not met, continuing to capture the biometric information without performing the predefined operation associated
  • a method performed at a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices comprises: capturing biometric information with a biometric sensor that is in communication with the first electronic device; displaying, on the display, a representation of an evaluation of a medical characteristic determined based on the biometric information captured by the biometric sensor; while displaying the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs to add user-specified symptoms to the evaluation of the medical characteristic; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that at least one of the user-specified symptoms meet respective criteria, displaying, on the display, a first user interface that includes an affordance that, when activated, initiates a process for seeking immediate medical attention; and in accordance with a determination that the user-specified symptoms do not meet the respective criteria, displaying, on the display, the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic and one or more representations
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: capturing biometric information with a biometric sensor that is in communication with the first electronic device; displaying, on the display, a representation of an evaluation of a medical characteristic determined based on the biometric information captured by the biometric sensor; while displaying the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs to add user-specified symptoms to the evaluation of the medical characteristic; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that at least one of the user-specified symptoms meet respective criteria, displaying, on the display, a first user interface that includes an affordance that, when activated, initiates a process for seeking immediate medical attention; and in accordance
  • a transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including
  • a first electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: capturing biometric information with a biometric sensor that is in communication with the first electronic device; displaying, on the display, a representation of an evaluation of a medical characteristic determined based on the biometric information captured by the biometric sensor; while displaying the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs to add user-specified symptoms to the evaluation of the medical characteristic; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that at least one of the user-specified symptoms meet respective criteria, displaying, on the display, a first user interface that includes an affordance that, when activated, initiates a process for seeking immediate medical attention; and in accordance with a determination that the user-
  • a first electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices; means for capturing biometric information with a biometric sensor that is in communication with the first electronic device; means for displaying, on the display, a representation of an evaluation of a medical characteristic determined based on the biometric information captured by the biometric sensor; means, while displaying the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic, for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs to add user-specified symptoms to the evaluation of the medical characteristic; means, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, for: in accordance with a determination that at least one of the user-specified symptoms meet respective criteria, displaying, on the display, a first user interface that includes an affordance that, when activated, initiates a process for seeking immediate medical attention; and in accordance with a determination that the user-specified symptoms do not meet the respective criteria, displaying, on the display, the representation of the evaluation of the
  • a method performed at an electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, the electronic device operably connected to a plurality of biometric sensors comprises: receiving first biometric information from a first biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors; in response to receiving the first biometric information and in accordance with a
  • first biometric information satisfies first criteria, displaying, on the display, an alert including a first affordance for detecting additional biometric information; receiving, via the one or more input devices, user activation of the first affordance; and subsequent to receiving the user activation of the first affordance, receiving second biometric information associated with the first biometric information from a second biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors that is different from the first biometric sensor.
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, the electronic device operably connected to a plurality of biometric sensors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving first biometric information from a first biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors; in response to receiving the first biometric information and in accordance with a determination that the first biometric information satisfies first criteria, displaying, on the display, an alert including a first affordance for detecting additional biometric
  • a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described.
  • the transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display and one or more input devices, the electronic device operably connected to a plurality of biometric sensors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving first biometric information from a first biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors; in response to receiving the first biometric information and in accordance with a determination that the first biometric information satisfies first criteria, displaying, on the display, an alert including a first affordance for detecting additional biometric information; receiving, via the one or more input devices, user activation of the first affordance; and subsequent to receiving the user activation of the first affordance, receiving second biometric information associated with the first biometric information from a second biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors that is different from the first biometric sensor.
  • an electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices; is operably connected to a plurality of biometric sensors; memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving first biometric information from a first biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors; in response to receiving the first biometric information and in accordance with a determination that the first biometric information satisfies first criteria, displaying, on the display, an alert including a first affordance for detecting additional biometric
  • an electronic device comprises: a display; one or more input devices; is operably connected to a plurality of biometric sensors; means for receiving first biometric information from a first biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors; means, in response to receiving the first biometric information and in accordance with a determination that the first biometric information satisfies first criteria, for displaying, on the display, an alert including a first affordance for detecting additional biometric information; means for receiving, via the one or more input devices, user activation of the first affordance; and means, subsequent to receiving the user activation of the first affordance, for receiving second biometric information associated with the first biometric information from a second biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors that is different from the first biometric sensor.
  • Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.
  • devices are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing health monitoring, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices.
  • Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace other methods for managing health monitoring.
  • FIG. 1 A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some
  • FIG. 5 A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 5C-5D illustrate exemplary components of a personal electronic device having a touch-sensitive display and intensity sensors in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 5E-5H illustrate exemplary components and user interfaces of a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 6A-6AE illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initial setup of health monitoring.
  • FIGS. 7A-7C illustrate a flow diagram for initial setup of heath monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 8A-8S illustrate exemplary user interfaces for recording biometric information for use in health monitoring.
  • FIGS. 9A-9B illustrate a flow diagram for recording biometric information for health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 10A-10J illustrate exemplary user interfaces for using an input device for health monitoring.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a flow diagram for using an input device for health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 12A-12S illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing aspects of health monitoring.
  • FIGS. 13A-13B illustrate a flow diagram for managing aspects of health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 14A-14I illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing a health condition alert.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a flow diagram for providing a health condition alert, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, 3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5H provide a description of exemplary devices for performing the techniques for managing event notifications.
  • FIGS. 6A-6AE illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initial setup of health monitoring.
  • FIGS. 7A-7C illustrate a flow diagram for initial setup of heath monitoring.
  • the user interfaces in FIGS. 6A-6AE are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 7A-7C.
  • FIGS. 8A-8S illustrate exemplary user interfaces for recording biometric information for use in health monitoring.
  • FIGS. 9A-9B illustrate a flow diagram for recording biometric information for health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 8A-8S are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 9A-9B.
  • FIGS. 10A-10J illustrate exemplary user interfaces for using an input device for health monitoring.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a flow diagram for using an input device for health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the user interfaces in FIGS. 10A-10J are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 11.
  • FIGS. 12A-12S illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing aspects of health monitoring.
  • FIGS. 13A-13B illustrate a flow diagram for managing aspects of health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the user interfaces in FIGS. 12A-12S are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 13A- 13B.
  • FIGS. 14A-14I illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing a health condition alert.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a flow diagram for providing a health condition alert, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the user interfaces in FIGS. 14A-14I are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 15.
  • the term“if’ is, optionally, construed to mean“when” or“upon” or“in response to determining” or“in response to detecting,” depending on the context.
  • the phrase“if it is determined” or“if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean“upon determining” or“in response to determining” or“upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or“in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
  • the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions.
  • portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
  • Other portable electronic devices such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used.
  • the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch- sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touchpad).
  • an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick.
  • the device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.
  • the various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface.
  • One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application.
  • a common physical architecture (such as the touch- sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.
  • FIG. 1 A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Touch- sensitive display 112 is sometimes called a“touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a“touch-sensitive display system.”
  • Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input control devices 116, and external port 124.
  • Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164.
  • Device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100).
  • Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch- sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300).
  • These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.
  • the term“intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • the intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors.
  • one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact.
  • a pressure- sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch- sensitive surface.
  • the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements).
  • the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure).
  • the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure.
  • the term“tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch.
  • a component e.g., a touch-sensitive surface
  • another component e.g., housing
  • the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device.
  • a touch-sensitive surface e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad
  • a“down click” or“up click” of a physical actuator button is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a“down click” or“up click” of a physical actuator button.
  • a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an“down click” or“up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements.
  • movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as“roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users.
  • a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an“up click,” a“down click,”“roughness”)
  • the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
  • device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components.
  • the various components shown in FIG. 1 A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.
  • Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices.
  • Memory controller 122 optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device 100.
  • Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102.
  • the one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data.
  • peripherals interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.
  • RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals.
  • RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals.
  • RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
  • an antenna system an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
  • the RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio.
  • NFC near field communication
  • the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.1 la, IEEE 802.1 lb, IEEE 802.1 lg, IEEE 802.1 ln, and/or IEEE 802.1 lac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.
  • Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100.
  • Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111.
  • Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.
  • Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves.
  • Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118.
  • audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, FIG. 2).
  • the headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a
  • I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, such as touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116, to peripherals interface 118.
  • I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices.
  • the one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 116.
  • the other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth.
  • input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse.
  • the one or more buttons optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113.
  • the one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206, FIG. 2).
  • a quick press of the push button optionally disengages a lock of touch screen 112 or optionally begins a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549,“Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • a longer press of the push button e.g., 206) optionally turns power to device 100 on or off.
  • the functionality of one or more of the buttons are, optionally, user-customizable.
  • Touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.
  • Touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user.
  • Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 112.
  • Touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user.
  • the visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof
  • Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact.
  • Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 112 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 112.
  • user-interface objects e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images
  • Touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments.
  • Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112.
  • touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112.
  • projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
  • a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is, optionally, analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et ah), 6,570,557 (Westerman et ah), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100, whereas touch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.
  • a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313,“Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313,“Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent
  • Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi.
  • the user optionally makes contact with touch screen 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth.
  • the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus- based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen.
  • the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
  • device 100 in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions.
  • the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output.
  • the touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
  • Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various components.
  • Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
  • power sources e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)
  • AC alternating current
  • a recharging system e.g., a recharging system
  • a power failure detection circuit e.g., a power failure detection circuit
  • a power converter or inverter e.g., a power converter or inverter
  • a power status indicator e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164.
  • FIG. 1 A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 158 in EO subsystem 106.
  • Optical sensor 164 optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors.
  • Optical sensor 164 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image.
  • imaging module 143 also called a camera module
  • optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video.
  • an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition.
  • an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user’s image is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display.
  • the position of optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 164 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165.
  • FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106.
  • Contact intensity sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface).
  • Contact intensity sensor 165 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment.
  • contact intensity information e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information
  • At least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on the front of device 100.
  • a touch-sensitive surface e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112
  • at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on the front of device 100.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166.
  • FIG. 1 A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118.
  • proximity sensor 166 is, optionally, coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106.
  • Proximity sensor 166 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11/240,788,“Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11/620,702,“Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”;
  • the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user’s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167.
  • FIG. 1 A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106.
  • Tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device).
  • Contact intensity sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100.
  • At least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100).
  • a touch-sensitive surface e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112
  • at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on the front of device 100.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168.
  • FIG. 1 A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118.
  • accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled to an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106.
  • Accelerometer 168 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S.
  • information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers.
  • Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.
  • the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136.
  • memory 102 FIG. 1A
  • 370 FIG. 3
  • Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 112; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and input control devices 116; and location information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.
  • Operating system 126 e g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS,
  • WINDOWS or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks
  • VxWorks includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
  • general system tasks e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.
  • Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124.
  • External port 124 e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • FIREWIRE FireWire
  • the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.
  • Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch screen 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel).
  • Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact).
  • Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface.
  • Determining movement of the point of contact which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g.,“multitouch’Vmultiple finger contacts).
  • contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.
  • contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has“clicked” on an icon).
  • at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100).
  • a mouse“click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware.
  • a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click“intensity” parameter).
  • Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user.
  • Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts).
  • a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern.
  • detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon).
  • detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.
  • Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed.
  • the term graphics includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.
  • graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.
  • Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.
  • Text input module 134 which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application that needs text input).
  • applications e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application that needs text input.
  • GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 143 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location- based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
  • applications e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 143 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location- based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
  • Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of
  • Contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);
  • Video conference module 139 • Video conference module 139;
  • IM Instant messaging
  • Workout support module 142 Workout support
  • Camera module 143 for still and/or video images
  • Calendar module 148 • Calendar module 148;
  • Widget modules 149 which optionally include one or more of: weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6;
  • Widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;
  • Video and music player module 152 which merges video player module and music player module
  • Map module 154 • Map module 154;
  • Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
  • contacts module 137 are, optionally, used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name;
  • an address book or contact list e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370
  • telephone module 138 are optionally, used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed.
  • the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.
  • video conference module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
  • e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions.
  • e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.
  • the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or
  • SMS Short Message Service
  • Multimedia Message Service MMS
  • MMS Multimedia Message Service
  • XMPP extensible Markup Language
  • SIMPLE Session Initiation Protocol
  • IMPS Internet-based instant messages
  • transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS).
  • EMS Enhanced Messaging Service
  • instant messaging refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
  • workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals);
  • workout sensors sports devices
  • receive workout sensor data calibrate sensors (e.g., heart rate or heart rhythm sensors) used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.
  • calibrate sensors e.g., heart rate or heart rhythm sensors
  • camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 102.
  • image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
  • modify e.g., edit
  • present e.g., in a digital slide show or album
  • browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
  • calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
  • widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user- created widget 149-6).
  • a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file.
  • a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a
  • JavaScript file e.g., Yahoo! Widgets.
  • the widget creator module 150 are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
  • search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
  • search criteria e.g., one or more user-specified search terms
  • video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on an external, connected display via external port 124).
  • device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
  • notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.
  • map module 154 are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
  • maps e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data
  • online video module 155 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264.
  • instant messaging module 141 rather than e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video.
  • Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein).
  • These modules e.g., sets of instructions
  • video player module is, optionally, combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 152, FIG. 1A).
  • memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above.
  • memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
  • device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad.
  • a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.
  • the predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces.
  • the touchpad when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100.
  • a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad.
  • the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
  • memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137-151, 155, 380-390).
  • event sorter 170 e.g., in operating system 126
  • application 136-1 e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137-151, 155, 380-390.
  • Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information.
  • Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174.
  • application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing.
  • device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.
  • application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
  • Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118.
  • Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display 112, as part of a multi-touch gesture).
  • Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110).
  • Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from EO subsystem 106 includes information from touch- sensitive display 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.
  • event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
  • event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173.
  • Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
  • FIG. 1 Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur.
  • the application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
  • Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
  • Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.
  • Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 182.
  • an event recognizer e.g., event recognizer 180.
  • event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173.
  • event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 182.
  • operating system 126 includes event sorter 170.
  • application 136-1 includes event sorter 170.
  • event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.
  • application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface.
  • Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180.
  • a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180.
  • one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties.
  • a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170.
  • Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192.
  • one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190.
  • one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170 and identifies an event from the event information.
  • Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some
  • event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).
  • Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170.
  • the event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement.
  • the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event.
  • the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event.
  • events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
  • Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event.
  • event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186.
  • Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187- 2), and others.
  • sub-events in an event (187) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching.
  • the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object.
  • the double tap for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase.
  • the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object.
  • the dragging for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensitive display 112, and liftoff of the touch (touch end).
  • the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.
  • event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object.
  • event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.
  • the definition for a respective event (187) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers.
  • metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190.
  • Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view.
  • event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process
  • event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
  • data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module.
  • object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object.
  • GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch- sensitive display.
  • event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178.
  • data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
  • event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens.
  • mouse movement and mouse button presses optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen 112 in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200.
  • UI user interface
  • a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure).
  • selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics.
  • the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100.
  • inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic.
  • a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
  • Device 100 optionally also include one or more physical buttons, such as“home” or menu button 204.
  • menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally, executed on device 100.
  • the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 112.
  • device 100 includes touch screen 112, menu button 204, push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210, headset jack 212, and docking/charging external port 124.
  • Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process.
  • device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113.
  • Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Device 300 need not be portable.
  • device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller).
  • Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or other communications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components.
  • CPUs processing units
  • Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components.
  • Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display 340, which is typically a touch screen display.
  • I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A).
  • sensors 359 e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A).
  • Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1 A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100.
  • memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1 A) optionally does not store these modules.
  • Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 3 is, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices.
  • Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above.
  • the above- identified modules or programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments.
  • memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300.
  • user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
  • Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications such as: o Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled Phone, which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;
  • o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152 also referred to as iPod
  • Icons for other applications such as: o Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled“Messages;”
  • Icon 442 for workout support module 142 labeled“Workout Support”
  • Icon 444 for notes module 153 labeled“Notes;”
  • icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A are merely exemplary.
  • icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled“Music” or“Music Player.”
  • Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons.
  • a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, FIG. 3) that is separate from the display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112).
  • Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 359) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.
  • one or more contact intensity sensors e.g., one or more of sensors 359
  • tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.
  • the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B.
  • the touch-sensitive surface e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B
  • the touch-sensitive surface has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4B) on the display (e.g., 450).
  • the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG.
  • finger inputs e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures
  • one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input).
  • a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact).
  • a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact).
  • a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact).
  • multiple user inputs it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
  • FIG. 5A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 500.
  • Device 500 includes body 502.
  • device 500 can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., FIGS. 1 A-4B).
  • device 500 has touch-sensitive display screen 504, hereafter touch screen 504.
  • touch screen 504 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied.
  • the one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches.
  • the user interface of device 500 can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 500.
  • PCT/US2013/040061 titled“Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2013/169849, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled“Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed November 11, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508.
  • Input mechanisms 506 and 508, if included, can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms.
  • device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 500 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 500 to be worn by a user.
  • FIG. 5B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 500.
  • device 500 can include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1 A,
  • Device 500 has bus 512 that operatively couples I/O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518.
  • I/O section 514 can be connected to display 504, which can have touch-sensitive component 522 and, optionally, intensity sensor 524 (e.g., contact intensity sensor).
  • I/O section 514 can be connected with communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques.
  • Device 500 can include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508.
  • Input mechanism 506 is, optionally, a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device (e.g., a rotating crown), for example.
  • Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button, in some examples.
  • Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples.
  • Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as GPS sensor 532, accelerometer 534, directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536, motion sensor 538, and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 514.
  • sensors such as GPS sensor 532, accelerometer 534, directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536, motion sensor 538, and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 514.
  • Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 can include one or more non- transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 516, for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including processes 700 (FIGS. 7A-7C), 900 (FIGS. 9A-9B), 1100 (FIG. 11), and 1300 (FIGS. 13A-13B).
  • a computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium.
  • the storage medium is a non- transitory computer-readable storage medium.
  • the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium can include, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductor storages. Examples of such storage include magnetic disks, optical discs based on CD, DVD, or Blu- ray technologies, as well as persistent solid-state memory such as flash, solid-state drives, and the like.
  • Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.
  • the term“affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on the display screen of devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1 A, 3, and 5A-5B).
  • an image e.g., icon
  • a button e.g., button
  • text e.g., hyperlink
  • the term“focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting.
  • the cursor acts as a“focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
  • a touch-sensitive surface e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B
  • a particular user interface element e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element
  • a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a“focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
  • a particular user interface element e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element
  • focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these
  • the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface.
  • the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact).
  • a focus selector e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box
  • a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).
  • the term“characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact.
  • the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples.
  • the characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact).
  • a predefined time period e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds
  • characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally, based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like.
  • the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time).
  • the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user.
  • the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold.
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation.
  • a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
  • FIG. 5C illustrates detecting a plurality of contacts 552A-552E on touch-sensitive display screen 504 with a plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D.
  • FIG. 5C additionally includes intensity diagrams that show the current intensity measurements of the intensity sensors 524A-524D relative to units of intensity.
  • the intensity measurements of intensity sensors 524A and 524D are each 9 units of intensity, and the intensity
  • measurements of intensity sensors 524B and 524C are each 7 units of intensity.
  • an aggregate intensity is the sum of the intensity measurements of the plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D, which in this example is 32 intensity units.
  • each contact is assigned a respective intensity that is a portion of the aggregate intensity.
  • FIG. 5D illustrates assigning the aggregate intensity to contacts 552A- 552E based on their distance from the center of force 554.
  • each of contacts 552 A, 552B, and 552E are assigned an intensity of contact of 8 intensity units of the aggregate intensity
  • each of contacts 552C and 552D are assigned an intensity of contact of 4 intensity units of the aggregate intensity.
  • Ij A (Dj/ ⁇ Di)
  • Dj the distance of the respective contact j to the center of force
  • the operations described with reference to FIGS. 5C-5D can be performed using an electronic device similar or identical to device 100, 300, or 500.
  • a characteristic intensity of a contact is based on one or more intensities of the contact.
  • the intensity sensors are used to determine a single characteristic intensity (e.g., a single characteristic intensity of a single contact). It should be noted that the intensity diagrams are not part of a displayed user interface, but are included in FIGS. 5C-5D to aid the reader.
  • a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
  • a touch-sensitive surface optionally receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases.
  • the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is, optionally, based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location).
  • a smoothing algorithm is, optionally, applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact.
  • the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm.
  • these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
  • the intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds.
  • the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad.
  • the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad.
  • the device when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch- sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold.
  • a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected
  • these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.
  • An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a“light press” input.
  • An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a“deep press” input.
  • An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface.
  • a decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface.
  • the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.
  • one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold.
  • the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a“down stroke” of the respective press input).
  • the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an“up stroke” of the respective press input).
  • FIGS. 5E-5H illustrate detection of a gesture that includes a press input that corresponds to an increase in intensity of a contact 562 from an intensity below a light press intensity threshold (e.g.,“ITL”) in FIG. 5E, to an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g.,“ITD”) in FIG. 5H.
  • the gesture performed with contact 562 is detected on touch-sensitive surface 560 while cursor 576 is displayed over application icon 572B corresponding to App 2, on a displayed user interface 570 that includes application icons 572A-572D displayed in predefined region 574.
  • the gesture is detected on touch-sensitive display 504.
  • the intensity sensors detect the intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 560.
  • the device determines that the intensity of contact 562 peaked above the deep press intensity threshold (e.g.,“ITD”).
  • the deep press intensity threshold e.g.,“ITD”.
  • Contact 562 is maintained on touch-sensitive surface 560.
  • reduced-scale representations 578A-578C e.g., thumbnails
  • the intensity which is compared to the one or more intensity thresholds, is the characteristic intensity of a contact. It should be noted that the intensity diagram for contact 562 is not part of a displayed user interface, but is included in FIGS. 5E-5H to aid the reader.
  • the display of representations 578A-578C includes an animation.
  • representation 578A is initially displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5F.
  • representation 578A moves upward and representation 578B is displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5G.
  • representations 578A moves upward, 578B moves upward toward representation 578A, and representation 578C is displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5H.
  • Representations 578A-578C form an array above icon 572B.
  • the animation progresses in accordance with an intensity of contact 562, as shown in FIGS. 5F-5G, where the representations 578A-578C appear and move upwards as the intensity of contact 562 increases toward the deep press intensity threshold (e.g.,
  • the intensity, on which the progress of the animation is based is the characteristic intensity of the contact.
  • the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed“jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold).
  • the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold.
  • the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an“up stroke” of the respective press input).
  • the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).
  • the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold.
  • the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.
  • an“installed application” refers to a software application that has been downloaded onto an electronic device (e.g., devices 100, 300, and/or 500) and is ready to be launched (e.g., become opened) on the device.
  • a downloaded application becomes an installed application by way of an installation program that extracts program portions from a downloaded package and integrates the extracted portions with the operating system of the computer system.
  • the terms“open application” or“executing application” refer to a software application with retained state information (e.g., as part of device/global internal state 157 and/or application internal state 192).
  • An open or executing application is, optionally, any one of the following types of applications:
  • a suspended or hibernated application which is not running, but has state information that is stored in memory (volatile and non-volatile, respectively) and that can be used to resume execution of the application.
  • closing an application refers to software applications without retained state information (e.g., state information for closed applications is not stored in a memory of the device). Accordingly, closing an application includes stopping and/or removing application processes for the application and removing state information for the application from the memory of the device. Generally, opening a second application while in a first application does not close the first application. When the second application is displayed and the first application ceases to be displayed, the first application becomes a background application.
  • UP user interfaces
  • associated processes that are implemented on one or more electronic device(s), such as portable multifunction device 100, device 300, or device 500.
  • FIGS. 6A-6AE illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initial setup of health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 7A-7C.
  • the exemplary user interfaces in these figures relate generally to monitoring health using recorded biometric information, and are not limited to a specific type of biometric information. Only for the sake of convenience, the exemplary user interfaces in these figures are described with reference to a type of biometric information— electrocardiogram
  • ECG ECG
  • FIG. 6 A illustrates a first electronic device 600 A (e.g., a smartphone) with a display 602 and one or more input devices.
  • the one or more input devices include a touch layer of display 602 for detecting touch input, one or more image sensors 604 (e.g., a camera, a depth sensor), a first mechanical button 606 configured to perform one or more operations (e.g., and including an integrated biometric sensor, such as a fingerprint sensor), and a second mechanical button 608 configured to perform one or more operations.
  • first electronic device 600A includes a wireless communication radio (e.g., for LTE, Bluetooth, WiFi connections).
  • first electronic device 600A is paired with a second electronic device (e.g., a smartwatch).
  • the second electronic device corresponds to second electronic device 600B described below with reference to FIGS. 6S-6X.
  • first electronic device 600A is displaying, on display 602, a homescreen user interface 610 corresponding to a homescreen of the operating system running on the device.
  • homescreen user interface 610 includes a plurality of icons corresponding to different applications that are installed on the device, including a health application corresponding to icon 610A.
  • the health application can be used to manage a user’s biometric information, such as heart rhythm information and/or heart rate information (e.g., using recorded ECG information).
  • first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 601 of icon 610A corresponding to a health application, which includes features concerning management of recordings of biometric information, including ECG information.
  • first electronic device 600 A launches the health application (e.g., by replacing display of homescreen user interface 610 with a user interface of the health application).
  • the health application includes an ECG affordance for viewing and managing existing ECG recordings on the device, where the ECG information is recorded using a related ECG application on a second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B described with reference to FIGS. 6S-6X), where the ECG application on the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B) is associated with the ECG management features of the health application on first electronic device 600A.
  • a second electronic device e.g., second electronic device 600B described with reference to FIGS. 6S-6X
  • the ECG application on the second electronic device e.g., second electronic device 600B
  • launching of the ECG management features on the health application causes display of a first page of a tutorial for performing initial setup of the ECG management features of the health application (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6F).
  • homescreen user interface 610 includes a paired device application corresponding to icon 610B and associated with a device paired with first electronic device 600A (e.g., second electronic device 600B).
  • first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a tap input) a user activation 641 of icon 610B, as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602, a main user interface 643 of the paired device application, as shown in FIG. 6C.
  • the paired device application includes a plurality of application setting affordances 645 A-645H corresponding to various applications installed on the paired device (e.g., second electronic device 600B), including a heart application setting affordance 645G corresponding to a heart application (e.g., the ECG application) installed on the paired device.
  • the device while displaying main user interface 643 of the paired device application, the device detects (e.g., via a tap input) a user activation 647 of heart application setting affordance 645G.
  • first electronic device 600A in response to detecting user activation 647 of heart application setting affordance 645G, displays, on display 602, an application settings page 649 for changing and/or configuring application settings of the corresponding heart application (e.g., the ECG application) on second electronic device 600B, as shown in FIG. 6D.
  • application settings page 649 includes an affordance 651 (e.g., an affordance labelled“Set up ECG functionality” or“Set up ECG application in Health”) for performing initial setup of the ECG management features.
  • first electronic device 600 A launches the first page of the tutorial (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6F) in response to detecting a user activation of affordance 651.
  • FIG. 6E illustrates first electronic device 600A displaying, on display 602, a (selectable) notification 612 indicating (to the user of the device) that an ECG application, which is associated with the health application on first electronic device 600A, has launched (or is active) on a second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B).
  • notification 612 is displayed on a lockscreen user interface of the first electronic device.
  • notification 612 is displayed in homescreen user interface 610 of the device (e.g., at a top portion of the display).
  • notification 612 is displayed over a user interface of an application (e.g., email application, web browser application) running on the device (e.g., at a top portion of the display).
  • an application e.g., email application, web browser application
  • notification 612 indicates that initial setup (e.g., onboarding) of the ECG management features of the health application need to be performed in order to utilize ECG features of the application.
  • first electronic device 600A while displaying notification 612, detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user selection 603 of notification 612. In response to detecting user selection 603, first electronic device 600A launches a first page of a tutorial for performing initial setup of the ECG management features and associated ECG application.
  • FIG. 6F illustrates first electronic device 600A displaying, on display 602, a first page 614 of the tutorial for performing initial setup of the ECG management features and associated ECG application.
  • first page 614 of the tutorial includes a graphical indication region 614A that graphically indicates (e.g., via a static image, via an animation) a function of the ECG management features and associated ECG application (e.g., recording heart rhythm information and/or heart rate information) and instructions on how to perform the function (e.g., using the associated ECG application on a smartwatch paired to the device).
  • a function of the ECG management features and associated ECG application e.g., recording heart rhythm information and/or heart rate information
  • instructions on how to perform the function e.g., using the associated ECG application on a smartwatch paired to the device.
  • first page 614 of the tutorial includes a text description region 614B describing a use of the ECG management features and associated ECG application (e.g., stating“Check your heart rhythm”) and background information relevant to the use of the ECG management features and associated ECG application.
  • a text description region 614B describing a use of the ECG management features and associated ECG application (e.g., stating“Check your heart rhythm”) and background information relevant to the use of the ECG management features and associated ECG application.
  • first page 614 of the tutorial includes a date of birth entry field 614C for receiving a user input corresponding to the user’s date of birth, where the user’s date of birth is used to determine whether the user meets a minimum age requirement (e.g., 22 years of age) to use the features of the ECG application.
  • date of birth entry field 614C includes scrollable month, day, and year fields.
  • first page 614 of the tutorial does not include date of birth entry field 614C.
  • first page 614 of the tutorial includes (e.g., in addition to or alternatively to date of birth entry field 614C) an age restriction message (e.g., stating“You must be 22 years or older”) indicating to the user that the user must meet the minimum age requirement.
  • an age restriction message e.g., stating“You must be 22 years or older
  • first page 614 of the tutorial includes an affordance 614D for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 605 of affordance 614D for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602, an error notification (e.g., stating“The ECG application is not intended for use by people under 22”) indicating that the user does not meet the requisite minimum age requirement.
  • the error notification is overlaid on first page 614 of the tutorial.
  • the background of the display is dimmed (thereby emphasizing the displayed error notification).
  • first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602 (e.g., replaces display of first page 614 with), a second page 616 of the tutorial, as shown in FIG. 6G.
  • FIG. 6G illustrates first electronic device 600A displaying, on display 602, second page 616 of the tutorial for performing initial setup of the ECG management features and the associated ECG application (e.g., where the associated ECG application is running on or can be launched on a second electronic device, such as second electronic device 600B).
  • second page 616 of the tutorial includes an animation region 616A that graphically indicates (e.g., via a static image, via an animation) example ECG information captured using the application.
  • animation region 616A includes an example tachogram-animation.
  • the example tachogram-animation includes one or more objects that continuously move across the animation by tracking the tachogram-like portion of the animation.
  • second page 616 of the tutorial includes a text description region 616B that summarizes how the ECG information is captured from the user and how the recorded biometric information can be viewed by the user.
  • second page 616 of the tutorial includes an affordance 616C for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • first electronic device 600A while displaying second page 616 of the tutorial for performing initial setup of the ECG management features and associated ECG application, first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 607 of affordance 616C for proceeding with the tutorial. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user activation 607, the device displays, on display 602 (e.g., replaces display of first page 616 with), a possible results page 618 of the tutorial, as shown in FIG. 6H.
  • FIG. 6H illustrates first electronic device 600A displaying, on display 602, possible results page 618 of the tutorial for performing initial setup of the ECG management features and associated ECG application.
  • possible results page 618 includes a plurality of representations of possible evaluation results that can be made based on ECG information recorded using the associated ECG application on a second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B).
  • the plurality of representations of possible evaluation results shown in possible results page 618 of the tutorial include possible evaluation results corresponding to heart rhythm and heart rate that are captured from an ECG recording.
  • a first possible evaluation result is a“regular rhythm” result (or a “normal result”), which corresponds to a result where no abnormal signs were determined from the ECG recording of the user.
  • a second possible evaluation result is an“abnormal heart rhythm” result (e.g., an“Atrial Fibrillation result) that corresponds to a result where abnormal heart rhythm signs (and, in some cases, high/low heart rate signs) were determined from the ECG recording of the user.
  • an“abnormal heart rhythm” result e.g., an“Atrial Fibrillation result
  • a third possible evaluation result is an“abnormal heart rate” result (e.g., a “high or low heart rate” result), which corresponds to a result where an unusually (or abnormally) high or low heart rate was determined from the ECG recording of the user (e.g., above 150 BPM or below 50 BPM).
  • a fourth possible evaluation result is an“inconclusive” result, which corresponds to a result where no evaluation result could be determined from the ECG recording of the user (e.g., because of a poor reading).
  • possible results page 618 shows a plurality of representations of possible evaluation results, where not all of the representations are concurrently visible on the display.
  • each representation of a possible evaluation result shown on possible results page 618 includes an animation region that includes a graphical animation (e.g., a tachogram-like animation, a beating heart animation, one or more objects that continuously/repeatedly move across the tachogram-like animation in a particular frequency) that represents its respective evaluation result and a text region that shows a portion of a text description explaining (medical) characteristics of its respective evaluation result.
  • a graphical animation e.g., a tachogram-like animation, a beating heart animation, one or more objects that continuously/repeatedly move across the tachogram-like animation in a particular frequency
  • representation 620 of a“regular” result includes an animation region 620A that includes an example animation of a“regular” result and a text region 620B that shows a portion of a text description explaining characteristics of a“regular” result
  • representation 622 of an“Atrial Fibrillation” result includes an animation region 622A that includes an example animation of an“Atrial Fibrillation” result and a text region 622B that shows a portion of a text description explaining medical characteristics of an“Atrial
  • the animations include a beating heart animation and a tachogram-like animation that in combination illustrate a rhythm and rate of heartbeats.
  • a representation of a possible evaluation result also includes an expand affordance (e.g., a“show more” affordance) for displaying the full text description of the respective evaluation result (e.g., by expanding the text region).
  • an expand affordance e.g., a“show more” affordance
  • representation 620 of a“regular” result includes an expand affordance 620C which, when selected (e.g., via a touch input), causes display of the full text description (e.g., which includes additional text information not shown in text region 620B) about a“regular” result
  • representation 622 of an“Atrial Fibrillation” result includes an expand affordance 622C which, when selected (e.g., via a touch input), causes display of the full text description (e.g., which includes additional text information not shown in text region 622B) about an“Atrial Fibrillation” result.
  • first electronic device 600A while displaying possible results page 618 with representation 620 and representation 622 visible on display 602, first electronic device 600A detects a scrolling input 609 (e.g., a scrolling touch gesture on the display). In response to detecting scrolling input 609, the device scrolls possible results page 618 such that one or more other representations of other possible evaluation results become visible on display 602, as shown in FIG. 6J.
  • a scrolling input 609 e.g., a scrolling touch gesture on the display.
  • representation 624 of a“high or low heart rate” result is fully visible on display 602.
  • representation 624 of a“high or low heart rate” result is fully visible on display 602.
  • representation 624 includes an animation region 624A that includes an example graphical animation of a“high or low heart rate” result, a text region 624B showing a portion of a text description explaining medical characteristics of a“high or low heart rate” result, and an expand affordance 624C for expanding text region 624C to fully show all of the text of the text description. Also in FIG. 6J, representation 622 of an“Atrial Fibrillation” remains fully visible on the display while only a portion of representation 626 of an“inconclusive” result is visible on the display.
  • first electronic device 600A while displaying possible results page 618 with representation 620 of a“Atrial Fibrillation” result visible on display 602, first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 611 of expand affordance 622C (e.g., because the user wants to view all of the text of the text description describing the“Atrial Fibrillation” result).
  • a user activation 611 of expand affordance 622C e.g., because the user wants to view all of the text of the text description describing the“Atrial Fibrillation” result.
  • FIG. 6L in response to detecting user activation 622C of expand affordance 622C, first electronic device 600A expands text region 622B of representation 622 of the “Atrial Fibrillation” result to display the full text of the text description.
  • the expand affordance upon expanding the text region, is removed from the representation. In some embodiments, upon expanding the text region, the expand affordance is replaced with a contract affordance (e.g., a“show less” affordance).
  • a contract affordance e.g., a“show less” affordance
  • first electronic device while displaying, on display 602, possible results page 618 with an expanded text region 622C of representation 622 of an“Atrial Fibrillation” result, first electronic device detects (e.g., via a touch layer of the display) a scrolling input 613 (e.g., a scrolling touch gesture). In response to detecting scrolling input 613, the device scrolls possible results page 618 such that all of representation 626 of an“inconclusive” result is visible on the display, as shown in FIG. 6N.
  • a scrolling input 613 e.g., a scrolling touch gesture
  • representation 626 of an“inconclusive” result is fully visible on display 602.
  • representation 626 includes an animation region 626A that includes an example graphical animation of an “inconclusive” result, a text region 626B showing a portion of a text description explaining medical characteristics of an“inconclusive” result, and an expand affordance 626C for expanding text region 626C to fully show all of the text of the text description.
  • possible results page 618 includes (e.g., at the bottom of the page), an affordance 628 for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • the animations (of animations regions 620A- 626A) of the plurality of representations 620-626 of possible evaluation results on possible results page 618 comprise a beating heart animation and a tachogram-like animation that in combination illustrate a rhythm and rate of heartbeats.
  • the animations are synchronized.
  • each animation comprises repeating loops, where each loop consists of an object (e.g., a circular object) leaving the beating heart animation and moving across the screen while tracking the tachogram-like animation.
  • the repeating loops of the plurality of animations (of representations 620-626) are synchronized to begin and end at the on synched time intervals.
  • first electronic device 600 A While displaying, on display 602, affordance 628 possible results page 618 for proceeding with the tutorial, first electronic device 600 A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 615 of affordance 628 for proceeding with the tutorial. In response to detecting user activation 615, first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602 (e.g., replaces display of possible results page 618 with), a limitations page 630, as shown in FIG. 60. [0208] In some embodiments, limitations page 630 indicates to the user (e.g., via a text description) some limitations of evaluation results determined from ECG recordings taken on the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B).
  • limitations page 630 includes a list 630A of one or more medical characteristics that cannot be determined from recorded ECG information (e.g., heart attack, blood clots/stroke). In some embodiments, limitations page 630 includes (e.g., at the bottom of the page), an affordance 630B for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • ECG information e.g., heart attack, blood clots/stroke.
  • first electronic device 600A while displaying, on display 602, limitations page 630, first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 617 of affordance 630B for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • the device in response to detecting user activation 617 of affordance 630B, displays, on display 602, an instructions page 632, as shown in FIG. 6P.
  • one or more of pages 614, 616, 618, and/or 632 of the tutorial include a cancel affordance.
  • first electronic device 600A upon detecting user selection of a cancel affordance (e.g., in any one of pages 614, 616, 618, and/or 632 of the tutorial), displays, on display 602, a notification 653, as shown in FIG. 6Q.
  • notification 653 includes an indication 653A (e.g., stating“If you cancel now, you will go through the setup again before you can take an ECG recording”) informing the user that the current progress through the tutorial will be lost and the initial setup process will need to be re-initiated in order for the user to begin taking ECG recordings on second electronic device 600B.
  • notification 653 includes a confirmation affordance 653B (e.g., stating“Set up later”) for confirming the cancellation of the setup process and thus exit the tutorial.
  • the background of the display is dimmed (thereby emphasizing notification 653).
  • FIG. 6P shows first electronic device 600A displaying, on display 602, instructions page 632.
  • instructions page 632 includes a graphical indication region 632A and a text indication region 632B that provides instructions for how to proceed with an ECG recording using the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B).
  • graphical indication region 632A corresponds to graphical indication region 614A of first page 614 of the tutorial, and graphically indicates (e.g., via a static image, via an animation) a user taking an ECG recording using the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B).
  • text indication region 632B includes a list of instructions including required steps to perform the ECG recording on the second electronic device which can be, for example, a smartwatch with one or more biometric sensors that is paired to first electronic device 600A (e.g., second electronic device 600B).
  • instructions page 632 includes a postpone affordance 632C (e.g., showing“Take a recording later”) that enables a user to postpone taking the first ECG recording to a later time (and thus allows the user to complete the initial setup process without performing a first ECG recording).
  • first electronic device 600A while displaying instructions page 632, detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 631 of postpone affordance 632C.
  • first electronic device 600A in response to detecting user activation 631 of postpone affordance 632C, first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602, a confirmation notification 633, as shown in FIG. 6R
  • confirmation notification 633 is overlaid on instructions page 632.
  • confirmation notification 633 includes a text indication 633 A indicating to the user that the initial setup process is complete and that the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 600B) is now enabled to perform ECG recordings.
  • confirmation notification 633 includes a confirm affordance 633B for acknowledging the completion of the ECG initial setup process (without taking a first ECG recording) and exiting the setup process.
  • the device in addition to confirmation notification 633, displays a cancel affordance 635 for exiting dismissing confirmation notification 633 and returning to instructions page 632.
  • the background of the display displaying instructions page 632 is dimmed (thereby emphasizing the displayed confirmation notification).
  • FIGS. 6S-6X illustrate second electronic device 600B (e.g., a smartwatch) having a display 634 and one or more input devices (e.g., including a touch layer of display 634 and one or more mechanical buttons, such as a depressible, rotating crown).
  • a smartwatch e.g., a smartwatch having a display 634 and one or more input devices (e.g., including a touch layer of display 634 and one or more mechanical buttons, such as a depressible, rotating crown).
  • input devices e.g., including a touch layer of display 634 and one or more mechanical buttons, such as a depressible, rotating crown.
  • second electronic device 600B includes one or more biometric sensors (e.g., for recording ECG information, for detecting heart rhythm and heart rate of the user) comprising one or more electrodes integrated in an input device 636 (e.g., a mechanical input device, such as a depressible, rotating crown) of second electronic device 600B.
  • the one or more biometric sensors of second electronic device 600B further comprise one or more electrodes of (e.g., integrated in) a housing portion (e.g., the backplate) of second electronic device 600B, where the one or more electrodes integrated in the input device operate in conjunction with the one or more electrodes of the housing portion to capture biometric information (e.g., ECG information).
  • second electronic device 600B is displaying a watch face user interface 638 (e.g., a time screen of the device).
  • second electronic device 600B while displaying lock user interface 638, second electronic device 600B detects a user input 619 on input device 636.
  • user input 619 is a single press of input device 636 (e.g., such that the force of the press is past a threshold amount to cause a“click” of input device 636).
  • the second electronic device in response to detecting user input 619 on input device 636, displays, on display 634 (e.g., replaces display of lock user interface 638 with), a home user interface 640 (e.g., corresponding to a home screen of the device, a screen that includes a plurality of icons corresponding to applications installed on the device and can be launched on the device), as shown in FIG.
  • Home user interface 640 includes an icon 642 (e.g., an icon graphically depicted with a heart) corresponding to an ECG application installed on the device, where the ECG application on second electronic device 600B is associated with ECG management features of the health application installed on first electronic device 600A.
  • icon 642 e.g., an icon graphically depicted with a heart
  • second electronic device 600B while displaying, on display 634, icon 642 corresponding to the ECG application, second electronic device 600B detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 621 of icon 642. In response to detecting user activation of icon 642, the device launches and displays the ECG application and displays, on display 634 (e.g., replaces home user interface 640 with), a user interface 644 of the ECG application, as shown in FIG. 6EG.
  • user interface 644 of the ECG application includes an animation 646 (e.g., a fluid animation) that depicts a particular shape (e.g., a heart).
  • animation 646 comprises a plurality of dynamic objects (e.g., circular objects) that form the particular shape (e.g., a heart), where the shape appears three- dimensional and is visually fluid as the plurality of dynamic objects constantly move while maintaining the structure of the shape.
  • second electronic device 600B displays, on user interface 644 (and while maintaining display of animation 646), a notification message 648 indicating to the user that an action must be performed (by the user) to proceed with recording ECG information using the device (e.g.,“Hold your finger on the crown”), as shown in FIG. 6V.
  • a predetermined amount of time e.g., 5 seconds
  • second electronic device 600B displays, on user interface 644 (and while maintaining display of animation 646), a notification message 648 indicating to the user that an action must be performed (by the user) to proceed with recording ECG information using the device (e.g.,“Hold your finger on the crown”), as shown in FIG. 6V.
  • the user provides a user input (e.g., a contact or touch of a finger) on first input device 636 (e.g., which includes one or more integrated electrodes operating in conjunction with one or more electrodes in a housing portion (e.g., backplate) of second electronic device 600B) to proceed with the recording of the ECG information, as instructed by notification message 648.
  • a user input e.g., a contact or touch of a finger
  • first input device 636 e.g., which includes one or more integrated electrodes operating in conjunction with one or more electrodes in a housing portion (e.g., backplate) of second electronic device 600B
  • FIG. 6W illustrates first electronic device 600A displaying, on display 602, a recording-in-progress page 694 of the tutorial.
  • first electronic device 600A displays, in recording-in-progress page 694 of the health application associated with the ECG application, an indication 696 that the ECG recording is being carried out on second electronic device 600B.
  • indication 696 includes a graphical indication portion (e.g., illustrating an image corresponding to the device being used to perform the recording) and a text indication portion (e.g., stating“Recording in Progress”).
  • FIG. 6W also illustrates second electronic device 600B displaying, on display 634, user interface 644 of the ECG application while the ECG recording (e.g., corresponding to a user input 629 on input device 636) is being carried out.
  • second electronic device 600B displays a BPM indicator 698 showing the heart rate being detected by the recording.
  • second electronic device 600B further displays, over animation 646 (e.g., which, upon recording, transitions form its initial shape, such as a heart, to a grid-like pattern), a tachogram 699 that graphically depicts the ongoing recording.
  • a timer 697 continuously reflects (e.g., by counting down) the remaining time to successfully complete the recording.
  • FIGS. 8A-8S, 10A-10J, and 12A-12S are described in greater detail below in FIGS. 8A-8S, 10A-10J, and 12A-12S.
  • FIG. 6X illustrates first electronic device 600A and second electronic device 600B (immediately) after completing the ECG recording form FIG. 6W.
  • second electronic device 600B upon completing the ECG recording, transmits (e.g., via a Bluetooth connection) data of the ECG recording to first electronic device 600A.
  • second electronic device 600B upon completing the ECG recording, transmits (e.g., via a LTE or WiFi connection) data of the ECG recording to an external server, where the external server is also accessible by first electronic device 600A.
  • second electronic device 600B can record and locally store a plurality of ECG recordings and transmit the plurality of ECG recordings to first electronic device 600 A.
  • first electronic device 600A displays a summary page 695 of the tutorial, where summary page 695 includes a representation 693 of the completed recording.
  • representation 693 includes the evaluation result (e.g.,“Regular Rhythm”), the heart rate reading (e.g., in BPM), and a graphical depiction (e.g., a tachogram) of the recording.
  • summary page 695 of the tutorial includes an affordance 693 for leaving the summary page.
  • summary page 695 of first electronic device 600A includes a completion button 691 for exiting the tutorial (after having completed the tutorial).
  • representation 639 of summary page 695 is displayed without an indication of an evaluation result, a heart rate reading, and a graphical depiction of a recording (e.g., the evaluation result, heart rate reading, and graphical depiction fields are blank).
  • second electronic device 600B displays at least a portion of a corresponding summary page 689 (e.g., over user interface 644 of the ECG application with animation 646 in its initial pattern (e.g., a fluid heart-shaped pattern, as shown in FIG. 6V)).
  • summary page 689 includes the evaluation result (e.g.,“Regular Result”) and other related information about the completed recording.
  • summary page 689 slides onto the display from an edge of the display (e.g., a bottom edge of the display).
  • the user can perform a plurality of ECG recordings using the ECG application on second electronic device 600B.
  • the plurality of ECG recordings are transmitted from second electronic device 600B to first electronic device 600A (or to an external server accessible by first electronic device 600A) for viewing and management via the ECG management features of the health application on first electronic device 600A.
  • FIG. 6Y illustrates first electronic device 600A displaying, on display 602, a health data user interface 650 of the health application (e.g., that is associated with the ECG application on second electronic device 600B) after having performed several ECG readings using second device 600B.
  • the health application is accessible via a corresponding icon on a home user interface of the operating system of first electronic device 600A.
  • health data user interface 650 of the health application includes an affordance 650A (e.g., stating“Heart”) for viewing and managing heart health information.
  • affordance 650A e.g., stating“Heart”
  • first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 623 of affordance 650A.
  • the device displays, on display 602, a heart data user interface 652 corresponding to heart-specific features of the health application.
  • heart data user interface 652 of the health application on first electronic device 600A includes a heart rate affordance 654.
  • heart rate affordance 654 includes an indication of a range of the user’s heart rate measured (e.g., via second electronic device 600B) during a certain period of time (e.g., today).
  • heart data user interface 652 in response to detecting a user selection on heart rate affordance 654, displays a graphical depiction of the heart rate information summarized by heart rate affordance 654 within a graphical depiction region 656 of the user interface (and further highlights the affordance with a particular visual characteristic, such as a different color, to indicate to the user that the heart rate affordance is currently selected by the user).
  • heart data user interface 652 of the health application on first electronic device 600 A includes an ECG affordance 658.
  • ECG affordance 658 includes a summary of a heart health evaluation result (e.g., a“regular” result, a“Atrial Fibrillation” result, a“high or low heart rate” result, an inconclusive result) determined from one or more ECG recordings performed during a certain time period (e.g., today), and a number of recordings taken during the time period (e.g.,“2 readings”).
  • ECG affordance 658 includes an information affordance 658 A for viewing and managing information about existing ECG recordings (e.g., previously performed by the user on second electronic device 600B).
  • first electronic device 600A While displaying heart data user interface 652 with ECG affordance 658 visible on display 602, first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 625 of information affordance 658 A of ECG affordance 658. In response to detecting user activation 625 of information affordance 658A, first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602, an ECG management user interface 660, as shown in FIG. 6AA.
  • ECG management user interface 660 displays a predetermined number (e.g., three) of representations of the most-recent evaluation result determined from corresponding most-recent ECG recordings performed on second electronic device 600B.
  • the representations of the most-recent evaluation results include a graphical portion (e.g., a tachogram) that graphically depicts the recording and a text portion that indicates the type of evaluation result (e.g., a“regular” result, an“Atrial Fibrillation” result, a“high or low heart rate” result, an“inconclusive” result) and a measured heart rate (e.g., in BPM).
  • the representations of the most-recent evaluation results include an indication of one or more user-specified symptoms associated with the result and/or the number of user-specified symptoms associated with the result. In some embodiments, if the user specified that there are no symptoms to be associated with a result, then a“no symptoms” indication is showed in the corresponding representation of the result. In some embodiments, if the user did not specify any symptoms for a result (or indicate that there are no symptoms for the result), then a symptoms indication is not shown in the corresponding representation of the result. Features related to user selection of symptoms for a respective evaluation result is described in greater detail with reference to FIGS. 12A-12S.
  • first electronic device 600A detects a user activation of ECG affordance 658 at a location on the affordance that does not correspond to information affordance 658 A. In some embodiments, in response to the user activation, first electronic device 600A replaces display of the heart rate information shown in graphical depiction region 656 of FIG. 6Z with heart rhythm information, in a graphical form.
  • heart rhythm data user interface 660 shows a representation 662A corresponding to a most-recent ECG recording, a representation 662B corresponding to a second-most-recent ECG recording, and a representation 662C corresponding to a third-most- recent ECG recording.
  • representation 662A corresponds to a“regular” result, with a heart rate measurement of 74 BPM and an indication of 2 symptoms selected for the result.
  • representation 662B corresponds to an“inconclusive” result with no heart rate measurement determined for the result and a“no symptoms” specifically indicated by the user for the result.
  • representation 662C corresponds to an“Atrial Fibrillation” result, with a heart rate measurement of 111 BPM, and no indication or 0 or more selected symptoms because the user did not specify any symptoms or whether there were no symptoms for the result. Further, in some examples, because “Atrial Fibrillation” result is an abnormal result, at least a portion of representation 662C is highlighted with a particular visual characteristic (e.g., a warning color, such as yellow) that is different from a default visual characteristic.
  • a particular visual characteristic e.g., a warning color, such as yellow
  • ECG management user interface 660 also includes a plurality of affordances for viewing additional/different representations of additional/different past evaluation results and sorting/filtering the existing evaluation results.
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a“show all results” affordance 664A (e.g., which also indicates the number of associated existing recordings) for displaying
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a first filter affordance 664B for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a second filter affordance 664C for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to a“Atrial Fibrillation” result (e.g., representation 662C).
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a second filter affordance 664C for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to a“Atrial Fibrillation” result (e.g., representation 662C).
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a third filter affordance 664D for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to both a“Atrial Fibrillation” result and a“high heart rate” (e.g., a heart rate over 150 BPM) result.
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a fourth filter affordance 664E for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to both a“high heart rate” (e.g., a heart rate over 150 BPM) result and a“low heart rate” (e.g., a heart rate below 50 BPM) result.
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a fifth filter affordance 664F for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to a“high heart rate” (e.g., a heart rate over 150 BPM) result.
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a sixth filter affordance 664G for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to a“low heart rate” (e.g., a heart rate below 50 BPM) result.
  • ECG management user interface 660 includes a seventh filter affordance 664H for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to an“inconclusive” result (e.g., because the measured heart rate was too high or too low to determine an evaluation result, because the captured ECG information was incomplete and/or unreadable to determine an evaluation result).
  • a seventh filter affordance 664H for displaying (e.g., filtering the existing recordings to show) representations of all of the existing ECG recordings corresponding to an“inconclusive” result (e.g., because the measured heart rate was too high or too low to determine an evaluation result, because the captured ECG information was incomplete and/or unreadable to determine an evaluation result).
  • first electronic device 600A while displaying ECG management user interface 660 on display 602, first electronic device 600A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user selection 627 of representation 662A (corresponding to a“regular” result, with a heart rate measurement of 74 BPM and an indication of 2 symptoms selected for the result). In response to detecting user selection 627, first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602 (e.g., replaces display of ECG management user interface 660 with), a details page 666 corresponding to the selected evaluation result, as shown in FIG. 6AC.
  • a user selection 627 of representation 662A corresponding to a“regular” result, with a heart rate measurement of 74 BPM and an indication of 2 symptoms selected for the result.
  • first electronic device 600A displays, on display 602 (e.g., replaces display of ECG management user interface 660 with), a details page 666 corresponding to the selected evaluation result, as shown in FIG. 6AC.
  • a details page includes one or more descriptive items (e.g., a tachogram, a type of evaluation result, a measured BPM of the result, a presence of lack of presence of Atrial Fibrillation, one or more selected symptoms) associated with the selected evaluation result.
  • Details page 666 corresponds to the evaluation result of representation 662A (from FIG. 6AB), which is a“regular” result.
  • details page 666 includes an animation 668A that graphically depicts the recording of this regular result (e.g.
  • a tachogram representing the measured heart rhythm and heart rate data an indication 668B that indicates the determined evaluation result of the recording (a“regular” result), an indication 668C that indicates whether one or more specific medical characteristics (e.g., Atrial Fibrillation) was determined from the ECG recording (e.g.,“This recording did not show signs of Atrial Fibrillation”), and an indication 668D that indicates (or lists) the user- specified symptoms associated with the ECG recording (e.g.,“chest pain” and“shortness of breath”).
  • specific medical characteristics e.g., Atrial Fibrillation
  • a details page (e.g., details page 666) includes an information affordance 670 which causes display of a text description explaining general medical characteristics of the corresponding evaluation result.
  • the text description corresponds to the full text description displayed in an expanded text region of possible results page 618 of the tutorial, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6H-6N.
  • a details page (e.g., details page 666) includes a share affordance 672 for sharing a document (e.g., a PDF document) summarizing the
  • first electronic device 600A in response to detecting a user selection of share affordance 672, first electronic device 600A generates the document and enables the user to input an intended recipient (e.g., an email account) for (automatic) transmittal of the generated document to the intended recipient.
  • an intended recipient e.g., an email account
  • a details page (e.g., details page 666) includes an emergency contact affordance 674 (e.g., for seeking immediate medical care, for contacting 911).
  • an emergency contact affordance 674 e.g., for seeking immediate medical care, for contacting 911.
  • first electronic device 600A in response to detecting a user selection of emergency contact affordance 674, initiates a phone call to an emergency contact (e.g., 911).
  • a details page (e.g., details page 666) includes a metadata list 676 indicating one or more information items related to the ECG recording (e.g., the device used to perform the recording, the time of the recording, an operating system of the device used to perform the recording).
  • a details page (e.g., details page 666) includes a delete affordance 678 for deleting the ECG recording (e.g., from local storage on first electronic device 600A, from local storage on the second electronic device used to perform the recording, such as second electronic device 600B, from remote storage on an external server).
  • FIG. 6AD illustrates a document 680 (e.g., a PDF document) generated in response to detecting a user selection of share affordance 672 from details page 666.
  • document 680 includes basic user information 682 (e.g., name of the user, date of birth of the user).
  • document 680 includes an evaluation result 684 of the ECG recording (e.g., a“regular” result, an“Atrial Fibrillation” result, a“high or low heart rate” result, an“inconclusive” result).
  • document 680 includes a heart rate measurement 686 of the ECG recording (e.g., in BPM).
  • document 680 includes a time 694 of the ECG recording. In some examples, document 680 includes a list of symptoms 688 selected by the user for the ECG recording. In some examples, document 680 includes a tachogram 690 of the ECG recording (e.g., an unfiltered, full tachogram). In some examples, document 680 includes legend information 692 describing tachogram 690.
  • first electronic device 600A can enable and disable (e.g., via the health application and/or the paired device application described with reference to FIG. 6 A) ECG recording functionality on second electronic device 600B.
  • second electronic device 600B displays, on display 634, an error notification user interface 637 indicating to the user (e.g., via text stating“The ECG application has been remotely disabled”) that an ECG recording cannot be performed because ECG recording functionality has been disabled (by first electronic device 600A), as shown in FIG. 6AE.
  • FIGS. 7A-7C are a flow diagram illustrating a method for initial setup of heath monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Method 700 is performed at a first electronic device (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600A) with a display and one or more input devices (e.g., a biometric sensor, a touch layer of the display), where the first electronic device is paired with a second electronic device (e.g., 600B).
  • Some operations in method 700 are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.
  • method 700 provides an intuitive way for managing health monitoring. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing health monitoring, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to manage health monitoring faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.
  • the first electronic device displays (706), on the display (e.g., 602), a first portion of a tutorial (e.g., 614, 616, 618, 630, 632) for using a function (e.g., measuring heart rhythm information (an electrocardiogram) or heart rate information (BPM)) of the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) (e.g., a function performed using one or more biometric sensors of the second electronic device).
  • a function e.g., measuring heart rhythm information (an electrocardiogram) or heart rate information (BPM)
  • BPM heart rate information
  • Displaying the first portion of the tutorial for using the function of the second electronic device reduces the number of inputs needed by the user to initialize the first electronic device (e.g., 600A) and the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) for using the function by providing guidance on how to successfully complete the initialization process and providing important background information about using the function (e.g., without forcing the user to, without any guidance, test the function in order to learn how to use the function).
  • Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device prior to displaying, on the display (e.g., 602), the first portion of the tutorial (e.g., 614, 616, 618, 630, 632) for using the function of the second electronic device (e.g., 600B), the first electronic device (e.g., 600A) receives (702) (e.g., via a wireless communication radio of the first electronic device), from the second electronic device (e.g., 600B), a second indication that an application configured to control the use of the function on the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) is opened (e.g., launched, initiated) on the second electronic device (e.g., 600B).
  • Displaying the second indication that the application configured to control the use of the function on the second device (e.g., 600B) is opened provides the user with feedback about the current state of the second electronic device and visually indicates to the user that the second electronic device is ready for the operation that uses the function.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device in response to receiving the second indication that the application configured to control the use of the function on the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) is opened, displays (704), on the display (e.g., 602), a notification (e.g., 612) corresponding to the tutorial for using the function of the second electronic device. Displaying, on the display (e.g., 602), the notification
  • corresponding to the tutorial for using the function of the second electronic device provides the user with feedback about the current state of the second electronic device and visually indicates to the user a tutorial is available on the first electronic device (e.g., 600A) to proceed with configuring the use of the function on the second electronic device.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the notification informs the user that the application has launched on the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) and that the user can view the tutorial for using the function of the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) that relates to the launched application.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 600A
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 602), the tutorial in response to detecting the user selection of the notification (e.g., 612) improves visual feedback by indicating to the user that the tutorial corresponding to the displayed notification has launched on the first electronic device (e.g., 600A).
  • the first electronic device e.g. 600A
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device displays the first portion of the tutorial (e.g., 614, 616, 618, 630, 632) in response to an input received while displaying a user interface (e.g., 643) configured to modify one or more settings of the second electronic device (e.g., 600B).
  • a user interface e.g., 643
  • Displaying the first portion of the tutorial in response to an input received while displaying a user interface configured to modify one or more settings of the second electronic device improves visual feedback by indicating to the user that the displayed tutorial is associated with an application that can be used on the second electronic device.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device detects (708), via the one or more input devices, a request to proceed with the tutorial (e.g., a user’s tap input on one or more “continue” buttons, 614C, 616C, 628, 630B).
  • the first electronic device e.g., 600A
  • an operation e.g., capturing/recording biometric data
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 602) of the first electronic device (e.g., 600A), instructions to perform the operation on the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) that involves the function of the second electronic device improves visual feedback to the user indicating that the operation corresponding to the tutorial needs to be performed on the second electronic device (e.g., and not on the first electronic device).
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when
  • the operation on the second electronic device includes capturing biometric data (e.g., using a biometric sensor of the second electronic device).
  • the biometric data that is captured by the second electronic device is heart-related data (e.g., ECG data, BPM data).
  • the first portion of the tutorial includes a plurality of graphical indications of possible results (e.g., 620, 622, 624, 626, heart rhythm evaluation results, heart rate measurements) of the operation (e.g., an ECG recording operation, a BPM measurement operation) performed on the second electronic device (e.g., 600b).
  • the operation is evaluating a medical characteristic (of the user) including a heart rhythm evaluation (e.g., an electrocardiogram reading) and a heart rate evaluation (e.g., a BPM reading), and the possible results are selected from the group consisting of: a normal result (e.g., for the heart rhythm evaluation and/or for the heart rate evaluation), an abnormal heart rhythm pattern result (e.g., signs of Atrial Fibrillation), an abnormal heart rate result (e.g., BPM above a high threshold or below a low threshold, such as BPM over 150 or BPM below 50), and an inconclusive result (e.g., based on a poor reading).
  • a normal result e.g., for the heart rhythm evaluation and/or for the heart rate evaluation
  • an abnormal heart rhythm pattern result e.g., signs of Atrial Fibrillation
  • an abnormal heart rate result e.g., BPM above a high threshold or below a low threshold, such as BPM over 150 or BPM below 50
  • the first electronics device detects, via the one or more input devices, a user activation of an expand affordance (e.g., 624C) associated with the first result summary.
  • Providing the expand affordance while displaying at least the first possible result of the possible results, where the first possible result includes the portion of the first result summary improves visual feedback by indicating to the user that only a portion of the first result summary is not currently displayed, and that the expand affordance can be selected to cause all of the first result summary to be displayed.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the user activation of the expand affordance (e.g., 624C), displays, on the display (e.g., 602), all of (the text of) the first result summary.
  • the plurality of graphical indications of possible results include a first graphical indication (e.g., 620) that includes display of a first animation (e.g., 620A) related to a first possible result and a second graphical indication (e.g., 622) that includes a second animation (e.g., 622A) related to a second possible result, and the first animation and the second animation are synchronized.
  • the first animation and the second animations are dynamic animations that include a beating heart animation and tachogram-like features that depict a rhythm and rate of a heartbeat.
  • the first electronic device while displaying, on the display (e.g., 602), the plurality of graphical indications (e.g., 620, 622, 624, 626) of possible results, the first electronic device (e.g., 600A) detects, via the one or more input devices, a scrolling gesture (e.g., a scroll on the touch layer of the display). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the scrolling gesture, the first electronic device (e.g., 600A) scrolls the plurality of graphical indications (e.g., 620, 622, 624, 626).
  • a scrolling gesture e.g., a scroll on the touch layer of the display.
  • the first electronic device displays, on the display (e.g., 602), a third graphical indication (e.g., 624) that includes a third animation (e.g., 624A) related to a third possible result, where the third animation is synchronized with the first animation (e.g., 620A) and the second animation (e.g., 622A).
  • a third graphical indication e.g., 624 that includes a third animation (e.g., 624A) related to a third possible result, where the third animation is synchronized with the first animation (e.g., 620A) and the second animation (e.g., 622A).
  • the first animation (e.g., 620 A) includes a first portion of the animation (e.g., beating heart) that is animated at a fixed location and a second portion of the animation (e.g., dot) that animatedly moves from the fixed location to a second location.
  • first portion of the animation e.g., beating heart
  • second portion of the animation e.g., dot
  • the object follows a tachogram-like pattern when leaving the heart- shaped animation.
  • a first object of the first dynamic animation and a second object of the second dynamic animation repeatedly (continuously) leave their respective heart-shaped animations synchronously.
  • Providing an animation (e.g., first animation 620 A) for a graphical indication (e.g., one of 620, 622, 624, 626) of possible results improves visual feedback by indicating to the user that the operation discussed by the tutorial relates to heart monitoring, as shown in the animation, and providing visual guidance as to how each possible result derived from the heart monitoring operation differ.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first portion of the tutorial (e.g., 614, 616, 618, 630, 632) includes a limitations indication (e.g., 630, explaining to the user the limits of the operation, showing a list of medical characteristics that cannot be determined by the operation) that includes one or more medical characteristics that cannot be derived from the operation.
  • a limitations indication e.g., 630, explaining to the user the limits of the operation, showing a list of medical characteristics that cannot be determined by the operation
  • Providing the limitations indication (e.g., 630) in the first portion of the tutorial improves visual feedback by visually indicating to the user, during the setup process (such that the user is more likely to be made aware), the one or more medical characteristics that cannot be derived from the operation.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device 600A receives (716) (e.g., after the user has carried out the instructions on the second electronic device (e.g., 600B), via a wireless radio
  • the second electronic device e.g., 600B
  • an indication that the instructions have been carried out on the second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device receives (712), from the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) (e.g., via the wireless radio communication between the devices), an indication that the instructions have begun to be carried out (on the second electronic device).
  • the first electronic device in response to receiving the indication that the instructions have begun to be carried out, displays (714), on the display (e.g., 602), an indication (e.g., 820, a“recording in progress” page of the tutorial) that the instructions are being carried out on the second electronic device.
  • an indication e.g., 820, a“recording in progress” page of the tutorial
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 602), the indication that the instructions are being carried out on the second electronic device (e.g., 600B) in response to receiving the indication that the instructions have begun to be carried out enhances visual feedback by visually indicating to the user that the operation is being successfully carried out on the second electronic device (and thus that the setup process is proceeding along as intended).
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device In response to receiving the indication that the instructions have been carried out, the first electronic device (e.g., 600A) displays (718), on the display (e.g., 602), a second portion of the tutorial (e.g., 828, a“completion” page) that is different from the first portion.
  • a second portion of the tutorial e.g., 828, a“completion” page
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 602), the second portion of the tutorial that is different from the first portion in response to receiving the indication that the instructions have been carried out improves visual feedback by indicating to the user that the operation performed on the second electronic device has been completed (e.g., and thus that the setup process has been successfully completed and that the operation is available for future use).
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the second portion of the tutorial (e.g., 828, a“completion” page) includes a graphical animation (e.g., a tachogram-like animation) that represents (biometric) information obtained from the operation on the second electronic device.
  • a graphical animation e.g., a tachogram-like animation
  • the first electronic device displays (720), on the display (e.g., 602), a user interface of a health application (e.g., 650, 656, 660).
  • a health application e.g., 650, 656, 660
  • the first electronic device detects (722), via the one or more input devices, a user activation of an affordance (e.g., 658 A, an ECG affordance) for viewing recorded biometric information (e.g., recorded ECG and BPM readings).
  • an affordance e.g., 658 A, an ECG affordance
  • the affordance for viewing existing recordings of biometric information includes an indication of a number of existing recordings of biometric information (e.g., a number of recorded ECG and/or BPM readings).
  • Providing the indication of the number of existing recordings of biometric information in the affordance for viewing existing recordings of biometric information improves visual feedback by conveniently conveying to the user the number of existing recordings that can be viewed in the health application.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the user activation of the affordance (e.g., 658A) for viewing existing recordings of biometric information, displays (724), on the display (e.g., 602), a first plurality of representations (e.g., 662A-662C) corresponding to existing recordings of biometric information.
  • a representation of an existing recording of biometric information includes a tachogram corresponding to the recording, an evaluation result of the recording, the number of symptoms (if any) associated with the recording, and a heart rate (BPM) recorded by the recording.
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 602), the first plurality of representations (e.g., 662A-662C) corresponding to existing recordings of biometric information in response to detecting the user activation of the affordance for viewing existing recordings of biometric information improves visual feedback by conveniently providing to the user representations of some existing recordings (e.g., some of the most recent recordings) that may be of most relevance to the user.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first plurality of representations of existing recordings of biometric information include a first representation (e.g., 662C) corresponding to a first existing recording with an abnormal evaluation result (e.g., an abnormal heart rhythm, such as a Atrial Fibrillation condition), where the first representation (e.g., 662C) includes an indication of the abnormal evaluation result that is displayed with a first visual characteristic (e.g., highlighted with a warning color, such as yellow).
  • an abnormal evaluation result e.g., an abnormal heart rhythm, such as a Atrial Fibrillation condition
  • a first visual characteristic e.g., highlighted with a warning color, such as yellow
  • the plurality of representations of existing recordings of biometric information include a fourth representation (e.g., 662A) corresponding to a fourth existing recording with a normal evaluation result, and the fourth representation includes an indication of the normal evaluation result that is displayed with a second visual characteristic (e.g., a default color) different from the first visual characteristic.
  • a fourth representation e.g., 662A
  • the fourth representation includes an indication of the normal evaluation result that is displayed with a second visual characteristic (e.g., a default color) different from the first visual characteristic.
  • the first plurality of representations of existing recordings of biometric information include a second representation (e.g., 662A, 662B) corresponding to a second existing recording associated with user-specified symptoms, where the second representation includes an indication of the number of user-specified symptoms associated with the second existing recording (e.g.,“2 Symptoms,”“No Symptoms”).
  • the first plurality of representations of existing recordings of biometric information include a third representation (e.g., 662C) corresponding to a third existing recording not associated with any user-specified symptoms (e.g., because the user did not specify any symptoms for the recording), where the third representation does not include an indication of user-specified symptoms associated with the third existing recording.
  • Providing the second representation (e.g., 662A, 662B) corresponding to the second existing recording associated with user-specified symptoms improves visual feedback by conveniently indicating to the user whether or not (and if yes, how many) symptoms were previously selected by the user for the recording (e.g., thereby allowing the user to quickly recognize whether a particular recording by correspond to a more serious reading, if there are many user-specified symptoms associated with the recording).
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the user-specified symptoms cannot be modified after the symptoms have been specified and saved (by the user on the second electronic device).
  • the first electronic device displays (726), on the display (e.g., 602), a plurality of sort affordances (e.g., 664A-664H, to filter visible recordings by the type of evaluation results, such as normal results, abnormal heart rhythm results, or abnormal heart rate results) including a first sort affordance and a second sort affordance.
  • a plurality of sort affordances e.g., 664A-664H, to filter visible recordings by the type of evaluation results, such as normal results, abnormal heart rhythm results, or abnormal heart rate results
  • the first sort affordance includes an indication of a number of existing recordings of biometric information associated with the first type of evaluation result
  • the second sort affordance includes an indication of a number of existing recordings of biometric information associated with the second type of evaluation result.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 600A detects (728), via the one or more input devices, a user activation of the first sort affordance.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the user activation of the first sort affordance, displays (730), on the display (e.g., 602), a second plurality of representations (e.g., by replacing the first plurality of representations) corresponding to existing recordings of biometric information, where the second plurality of representations correspond to existing recordings associated with a first type of evaluation result (e.g., a normal result, an abnormal heart rhythm result, an abnormal heart rate result, an inconclusive result).
  • the first electronic device detects (732), via the one or more input devices, a user activation of the second sort affordance.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting user activation of the second sort affordance, displays (734), on the display (e.g., 602), a third plurality of representations (e.g., by replacing the first plurality of representations) corresponding to existing recordings of biometric information, where the third plurality of representations correspond to existing recordings associated with a second type of evaluation result.
  • the second and third plurality of representations have corresponding overlapping existing recordings, if one or more existing recordings are associated with both the first type of evaluation result and the second type of evaluation result.
  • the first electronic device detects, via the one or more input devices, a user selection of a first representation (e.g., 662 A) of the first plurality of representations (e.g., 662A-66C) corresponding to a first existing recording corresponding to a first evaluation result.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the user selection of the first representation, displays a first details view (e.g., 666) of the first existing recording.
  • the first electronic device while displaying the first details view (e.g., 666) of the first existing recording, the first electronic device (e.g., 600A) detects, via the one or more input devices, a user activation of an information affordance (e.g., 670, an“i” icon).
  • an information affordance e.g., 670, an“i” icon
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the user activation of the information affordance (e.g., 670), displays, on the display (e.g., 602), a result summary (e.g., text summarizing medical characteristics related to the respective result) and an animation from a corresponding possible result from the first portion of the tutorial (e.g., where the possible result from the tutorial corresponds to the evaluation result of the first existing recording).
  • a result summary e.g., text summarizing medical characteristics related to the respective result
  • an animation from a corresponding possible result from the first portion of the tutorial e.g., where the possible result from the tutorial corresponds to the evaluation result of the first existing recording.
  • the first electronic device while displaying the first details view (e.g., 666) of the first existing recording corresponding to a first evaluation result, the first electronic device (e.g., 600 A) detects, via the one or more input devices, a user activation of an export affordance (e.g., 672, marked as“share as a PDF”).
  • an export affordance e.g., 672, marked as“share as a PDF”.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting user activation of the export affordance (e.g., 672), creates (and subsequently transmitting to an intended recipient) a document that includes information concerning the first existing recording (e.g., information about the user, date and time of the recording, a tachogram of the (ECG) recording, the evaluation result of the recording).
  • the biometric data e.g., ECG data
  • the recording is included in the document without any filtering (of the data from the recording).
  • method 900 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 700.
  • method 1100 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 700.
  • method 1300 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 700.
  • method 1500 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 700. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.
  • FIGS. 8A-8S illustrate exemplary user interfaces for recording biometric information for use in health monitoring.
  • the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 9A-9B.
  • the exemplary user interfaces in these figures relate generally to monitoring health using recorded biometric information, and are not limited to a specific type of biometric
  • ECG ECG
  • FIG. 8 A illustrates a first electronic device 800 A (e.g., corresponding to second electronic device 600B).
  • first electronic device 800A is a smartwatch.
  • first electronic device 800A has a display 802 and one or more input devices (e.g., including a touch layer of display 802 and one or more mechanical buttons, such as a rotating crown).
  • first electronic device 800A includes one or more biometric sensors (e.g., for recording ECG information, for detecting heart rhythm and heart rate of the user) comprising one or more electrodes integrated in an input device 804 (e.g., a mechanical input device, such as a depressible, rotating crown) of first electronic device 800A.
  • biometric sensors e.g., for recording ECG information, for detecting heart rhythm and heart rate of the user
  • an input device 804 e.g., a mechanical input device, such as a depressible, rotating crown
  • the one or more biometric sensors of first electronic device 800A further comprise one or more electrodes of (e.g., integrated in) a housing portion (e.g., the backplate) of first electronic device 800 A, where the one or more electrodes integrated in the input device operate in conjunction with the one or more electrodes of the housing portion to capture biometric information (e.g., ECG information).
  • biometric information e.g., ECG information
  • FIG. 8A illustrates first electronic device 800A displaying, on display 802, a user interface 806 of an ECG application (e.g., corresponding to user interface 644 of the ECG application described with reference to FIGS. 6A-6AE).
  • an ECG application e.g., corresponding to user interface 644 of the ECG application described with reference to FIGS. 6A-6AE.
  • user interface 806 includes an animation 808 (e.g., a fluid animation, corresponding to animation 646 of user interface 644) that depicts a particular shape (e.g., a heart).
  • animation 808 comprises a plurality of dynamic objects (e.g., circular objects) that form the particular shape (e.g., a heart), where the shape appears three-dimensional and is visually fluid as the plurality of dynamic objects constantly move while maintaining the structure of the shape.
  • notification message 810 e.g., corresponding to notification message 648 of user interface 644 indicating to the user that an action must be performed (by the user) on the device to proceed with an ECG recording (to capture heart rhythm and heart rate information).
  • notification message 810 instructs the user of the type of input (e.g., a touch or contact on the input device that is below a threshold amount such that the input does not“click” the input device) and that the input must be maintained on the input device (e.g., for the duration of the recording).
  • the device prior to displaying user interface 806 of the ECG application (e.g., while first electronic device 800A is displaying a user interface of a different application or the display is off), the device detects (e.g., using a second biometric sensor that measures heart rate information without user input) heart rate information of the user for a period of time (e.g., 1 minute) and determines that the detected heart rate is above a threshold rate (e.g., above 150 BPM). In some embodiments, upon detecting that the detected heart rate is above the threshold rate for at least the period of time, the device displays, on display 802, a notification informing the user of the (continuous) high heart rate and requests that the user monitor his or her heart health using the ECG application.
  • a second biometric sensor that measures heart rate information without user input
  • a threshold rate e.g., above 150 BPM
  • first electronic device 800 A detects a user input 801 on input device 804 in accordance with the instructions from notification message 810.
  • user input 801 is a continuous touch or contact on the input device that is below a threshold amount (e.g., an input that does not“click” the input device).
  • the plurality of dynamic objects forming animation 808 transition from their initial pattern (e.g., of a shape) towards a different pattern, as shown in FIG. 8B.
  • first electronic device 800A upon detecting (and continuing to detect) user input 801, first electronic device 800A ceases to display, on display 802, notification message 810.
  • FIG. 8C illustrates first electronic device 800 A continuing to detect user input 801 on input device 804.
  • the plurality of dynamic objects forming animation 808 continue to transition toward and begin to form a different pattern (e.g., a grid of a tachogram).
  • first electronic device 800A displays, in user interface 806 (e.g., below animation 808), a timer 810 (e.g., a countdown timer of a predetermined amount of time, such as 30 seconds) that indicates the amount of time remaining to complete the ECG recording.
  • first electronic device 800A displays, in user interface 806 (e.g., below timer 810), a notification message 812 instructing the user to maintain the input on input device 804 (e.g., stating“Touch the crown and try to hold still”) to successfully complete the ECG recording.
  • FIG. 8D illustrates first electronic device 800A further continuing to detect user input 801 on input device 804.
  • first electronic device 800 A begins recording ECG
  • the device while recording the ECG information, displays, in user interface 806, a BPM indicator 814 showing the heart rate being detected by the recording. In some embodiments, while recording ECG information, the device further displays, over animation 808 (which, during a recording, forms a grid-like pattern), a tachogram 816 that graphically depicts the ongoing recording. In some embodiments, while recording ECG information, timer 810 continuously reflects (e.g., by counting down) the remaining time to successfully complete the recording.
  • FIG. 8E illustrates a second electronic device 800B (e.g., corresponding to first electronic device 600 A described with reference to FIGS. 6A-6AE).
  • second electronic device 800B is a smartphone that is paired with first electronic device 800A (e.g., via a short-range wireless communication radio connection, such as a Bluetooth connection).
  • second electronic device 800B is displaying, on a display 818, a user interface 820 of a health application that is associated with the ECG application running on first electronic device 800A.
  • second electronic device 800B displays, in user interface 820 of the health application associated with the ECG application, an indication 822 that ECG recording is on-going on first electronic device 800A.
  • indication 822 includes a graphical indication portion (e.g., illustrating an image corresponding to the device being used to perform the recording) and a text indication portion (e.g., stating Recording in Progress”).
  • FIG. 8F illustrates first electronic device 800A displaying, on display 802, user interface 806 of the ECG application while the device is continuing to perform the ECG recording from FIG. 8E.
  • the device detects that user input 801 on input device 804 is lost (e.g., because the user lifted the finger used for the input away from input device 804).
  • the device displays, in user interface 806, a message indication 824 (e.g., stating“Please keep your finger on the crown”) requesting that the user restore the user input on input device 804 in order to continue with the ECG recording.
  • a message indication 824 e.g., stating“Please keep your finger on the crown
  • the device while the user input is lost on input device 804, the device continues to count down towards the end of the recording (which is indicated by timer 810). In some embodiments, while the user input is lost on input device 804, the device pauses the recording until the user input is restored on input device 804. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the user input is lost on the input device 804, the first electronic device 800A resets the value of timer 810 (e.g., to the initial 30 seconds value) and restarts the recording if the user input is restored (e.g., restored within a predetermined time).
  • timer 810 e.g., to the initial 30 seconds value
  • first electronic device 800A (automatically) terminates the recording and transitions back to the initial user interface of FIG. 8 A.
  • the device (automatically) continues the recording (e.g., and re-starts the timer, if paused).
  • the time limit e.g., 5 seconds
  • the time limit e.g., 5 seconds
  • the device (automatically) terminates the recording and transitions back to the initial user interface of FIG. 8 A if the full time limit (e.g., 5 seconds) lapses without the user restoring the user input.
  • the full time limit e.g., 5 seconds
  • first electronic device 800 A again detects user input 801 on input device 804 before the time limit (e.g., 5 seconds) has lapsed from when the user input was lost in FIG. 8F. Because the user input on input device 804 was restored prior to expiration of the time limit (e.g., 5 seconds), the device continues the ECG recording without
  • FIG. 8H illustrates first electronic device 800 A continuing to detect user input 801 on input device 804 and the device continuing the ECG recording from FIG. 8G.
  • timer 810 continues to indicate the time remaining to complete the recording (e.g.,“1 second”).
  • FIG. 81 illustrates user interface 806 of the ECG application upon completion of the recording (which is indicated by timer 810 showing no time remaining).
  • the plurality of dynamic objects forming animation 808 re-transitions from the grid-like pattern during the recording toward their initial pattern (e.g., of a shape, such as heart) prior to the recording.
  • FIG. 8J illustrates first electronic device 800A and second electronic device 800B (immediately) after completing the ECG recording.
  • first electronic device 800A upon completing the ECG recording, transmits (e.g., via a Bluetooth connection) data of the ECG recording to second electronic device 800B.
  • first electronic device 800A upon completing the ECG recording, transmits (e.g., via a LTE or WiFi connection) data of the ECG recording to an external server, where the external server is also accessible by second electronic device 800B.
  • first electronic device 800 A can record and locally store a plurality of ECG recordings and transmit the plurality of ECG recordings to second electronic device 800B.
  • first electronic device 800A displays, on display 802, user interface 806 of the ECG application with animation 808 in its initial pattern (e.g., a fluid heart-shaped pattern) and at least a portion of a summary page 826 that includes an evaluation result (e.g.,“Regular Result”) and other related information about the completed recording.
  • summary page 826 slides onto the display from an edge of the display (e.g., a bottom edge of the display).
  • second electronic device 800B displays, in the health application, a summary page 828 of the health application associated with the ECG application on second electronic device 800A, where summary page 828 includes a representation 830 of the completed recording.
  • representation 830 includes the evaluation result (e.g.,“Regular Rhythm”), the heart rate reading (e.g., in BPM), and a graphical depiction (e.g., a tachogram) of the recording.
  • summary page 828 includes an affordance 832 for leaving the summary page.
  • FIG. 8K illustrates first electronic device 800A displaying, on display 802, (at least a portion of) summary page 826 corresponding to the ECG recording.
  • summary page 826 includes a summary region 834 that includes an indication 834A of the evaluation result (e.g.,“Regular Rhythm”) and an indication 834B of the heart rate reading (e.g., in BPM).
  • summary region 834 also includes a information affordance 836 for viewing a detailed description about the respective evaluation result (e.g., where the detailed description corresponds to the text description shown in possible results page 618 of the tutorial described with reference to FIGS. 6A-6AE).
  • summary page 826 includes an indication 838 of whether a particular medical characteristic (e.g., signs of Atrial Fibrillation, signs of irregular heart rhythm) was determined from the recording.
  • summary page 826 includes a symptoms region 840 that includes an affordance 842 for associating one or more symptoms to the reading.
  • the device while displaying summary page 826, the device maintains display of animation 808 (e.g., in its initial shape as shown in FIG. 8A) in the background of the summary page (e.g., in a lighter shade so that the summary page is easily legible to the user).
  • FIGS. 8L-80 illustrate a plurality of different error notification messages that can be displayed in user interface 806 of the ECG application while recording ECG information.
  • first electronic device 800A while performing a first ECG recording corresponding to a user input 803 on input device 804, first electronic device 800A detects movement of the user input on input device 804 above a threshold amount (e.g., there is movement with the user’s contact with input device 804, where the amount of the movement is above a threshold amount of movement).
  • a threshold amount e.g., there is movement with the user’s contact with input device 804, where the amount of the movement is above a threshold amount of movement.
  • first electronic device 800A in response to detecting the movement of the user input on input device 804 above the threshold amount (e.g., for at least a period of time, such as 5 seconds), first electronic device 800A displays (e.g., below timer 810), a notification message 844 (e.g., stating“Try not to move your arm”) requesting that the user restrict movement of user input 803 during the recording.
  • a notification message 844 e.g., stating“Try not to move your arm”
  • a period of time e.g., 5 seconds
  • first electronic device 800A continues to detect movement of the user input on input device 804 above the threshold amount.
  • first electronic device 800A displays (e.g., below timer 810, replaces display of notification message 844 with) a notification message 846 (e.g., stating“It may help to rest your arm on a table or in your lap”) indicating that the user could try resting his/her arm on a surface to stabilize the user input on input device 804.
  • a notification message 846 e.g., stating“It may help to rest your arm on a table or in your lap” indicating that the user could try resting his/her arm on a surface to stabilize the user input on input device 804.
  • first electronic device 800A while performing a second ECG recording corresponding to a user input 805 on input device 804, first electronic device 800A detects a press input on input device 804, where the force of the press is above a threshold amount (e.g., such that the user “clicks” input device 804). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the press input on input device 804, first electronic device 800A displays (e.g., below timer 810) a notification message 848 (e.g., stating“You do not need to click the crown”) informing the user that input device 804 does not need to be“clicked” to perform the recording, and/or informing the user that less force can be used for the input on input device 804 to successfully complete the recording.
  • a notification message 848 e.g., stating“You do not need to click the crown
  • first electronic device 800A while performing a third ECG recording corresponding to a user input 807 on input device 804, first electronic device 800A detects (e.g., as in FIG. 8F), that user input 807 on input device 804 is lost (e.g., because the user lifted the finger used for the input away from input device 804). In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the user input on (e.g., the user’s contact with) input device 804 is lost, first electronic device 800A displays (e.g., below timer 810) a notification message 850 (e.g., corresponding to
  • notification message 824 stating“Please keep your finger on the crown”) requesting that the user restore the user input on input device 804 to continue with the ECG recording.
  • FIG. 8P illustrates first electronic device 800A displaying, on display 802, user interface 806 of the ECG application while performing an ECG recording corresponding to a user input 809 on input device 804 (e.g., after an initial threshold time period (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed from the initiation of the recording).
  • an initial threshold time period e.g. 5 seconds
  • the required duration of an ECG recording is 30 seconds.
  • timer 810 e.g., showing“20 seconds” in FIG. 8P, 10 seconds have passed since the initiation of the recording.
  • first electronic device 800A displays a tachogram 816 corresponding to a visual illustration of the ECG recording. [0300] In FIG. 8Q, first electronic device 800A loses detection of user input 809 on input device 804. In some embodiments, in response to (e.g., immediately in response to or within a short period of time, such as 1 second) losing detection of the user input on input device 804, first electronic device 800A resets the ECG recording (e.g., terminates the previous recording and prepares to start a new recording), as indicated by timer 810 (e.g., which now shows“30 seconds,” the full duration of a recording.
  • timer 810 e.g., which now shows“30 seconds,” the full duration of a recording.
  • first electronic device 800A causes the remaining time indicated in timer 810 to“rewind” back to (e.g., count back up to) the initial duration in response to losing detection of the user input on input device 804.
  • first electronic device 800A causes tachogram 816 to show a“silent” tachogram, thereby further indicating to the user that ECG information is not being captured.
  • first electronic device 800A upon detecting that the user input on input device 804 has not been restored for a at least a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2.5 seconds), first electronic device 800A displays, in user interface 806 of the ECG application, a notification message 852 (e.g., stating“Hold your finger on the crown”) requesting that the user restore the input on input device 804, as shown in FIG. 8R.
  • the devices displays (e.g., re-displays) animation 808 in its initial pattern (e.g., a heart shape), as first described with reference to FIG. 8 A.
  • the plurality of dynamic objects forming animation forming animation 808 dynamically transition from the grid-like pattern of FIG.
  • first electronic device 800A upon detecting that the user input on input device 804 has not been restored for at least the predetermined period of time (e.g., 2.5 seconds), first electronic device 800A alternatively displays, in user interface 806 of the ECG application, animation 808 in its initial pattern (e.g., a heart shape) but forgoes displaying notification message 852, as shown in FIG. 8S.
  • the predetermined period of time e.g. 2.5 seconds
  • first electronic device 800A first transitions form the user interface of FIG. 8Q to the user interface of FIG. 8R upon detecting that the user input on input device 804 has not been restored for a first predetermined period of time (e.g., 2.5 seconds), and then transitions from the user interface of FIG. 8R to the user interface of FIG. 8S upon detecting that the user input on input device 804 has not been restored for a second predetermined period of time (e.g., which is the same as or different from the first
  • a first predetermined period of time e.g. 2.5 seconds
  • FIGS. 9A-9B are a flow diagram illustrating a method recording biometric information for health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Method 900 is performed at a first electronic device (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600B, 800A) with a display and one or more input devices including a biometric sensor (e.g., a set of one or more sensors, such as electrodes, configured to measure electrical activity correlated to portions of the heart of a user of the electronic device).
  • a biometric sensor e.g., a set of one or more sensors, such as electrodes, configured to measure electrical activity correlated to portions of the heart of a user of the electronic device.
  • method 900 provides an intuitive way for managing health monitoring.
  • the method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing health monitoring, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
  • the first electronic device displays (908), on the display (e.g., 802), a first user interface (e.g., of a health monitoring application or a health data measurement application, main user interface 806 of the ECG application, as shown in FIG. 8A) indicating that the first electronic device (e.g., 800A) is ready to detect biometric information (e.g., ECG data, BPM data, heart-related data).
  • a first user interface e.g., of a health monitoring application or a health data measurement application, main user interface 806 of the ECG application, as shown in FIG. 8A
  • biometric information e.g., ECG data, BPM data, heart-related data
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 802), the first user interface indicating that the first electronic device (e.g., 800A) is ready to detect biometric information provides visual feedback by indicating that biometric information is ready to be recorded on the first electronic device. Providing improved visual feedback to the
  • user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device prior to displaying the first user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8A), displays (902) a homescreen (e.g., 1012) that includes an application affordance (e.g., 1014) corresponding to a health monitoring application (e.g., for monitoring heart health, such as the ECG application).
  • a health monitoring application e.g., for monitoring heart health, such as the ECG application.
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 802), the application affordance corresponding to the health monitoring application on the homescreen provides visual feedback by indicating to the user that the health monitoring application can be accessed from the homescreen of the first electronic device (e.g., 800A).
  • the first electronic device detects (904), via the one or more input devices, a user activation of the application affordance.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • displays (906) on the display (e.g., 802), the first user interface (e.g., 806).
  • a (text) notification (e.g., 810) requesting the first input on the biometric sensor (e.g., 804) is displayed in the first user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8A) after a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed after detecting the user activation of the application affordance.
  • the notification (e.g., 810) instructs the user to place a finger on the first input device (e.g., 804).
  • Providing the notification (e.g., 810) requesting the first input on the biometric sensor in the first user interface after the predetermined amount of time has passed after detecting the user activation of the application affordance provides the user with more control of the device by helping the user avoid unintentionally an unintended operation (e.g., by selecting a wrong button or affordance) and simultaneously allowing the user to recognize that the input on the biometric sensor is required to proceed with the recording operation.
  • Providing additional control of the device (without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when
  • the recorded biometric information includes an
  • the biometric sensor e.g., 804 is a contact-based sensor, and the first input with the biometric sensor (e.g., 804) satisfies the first criteria when a contact (e.g., from a finger of a user) is detected on the biometric sensor (e.g., 804).
  • the first electronic device detects (910) a first input with the biometric sensor (e.g., 804) that satisfies first criteria (e.g., user contact with the biometric sensor, movement below a threshold, electrical interference below a threshold).
  • first criteria e.g., user contact with the biometric sensor, movement below a threshold, electrical interference below a threshold.
  • the first electronics device e.g., 800A
  • the first electronics device starts (912) to record biometric information detected by the biometric sensor (e.g., 804).
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • the indication of progress includes an indication of progress (e.g., 810) in recording the biometric information.
  • the indication of progress e.g., 810) is a countdown timer (e.g., showing a countdown in seconds from a predetermined start time to zero). Displaying, on the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8D), the indication of progress (e.g., 810) in recording the biometric information improves visual feedback by indicating to the user that the recording is being carried out and the duration for which the user must maintain the input to continue with the recording.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800 A
  • the first electronic device detects (912), via the one or more input devices, that the first criteria are no longer met (e.g., user contact with the biometric sensor 804 is lost).
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800 A
  • the indication of progress e.g., 810 in recording the biometric information and maintaining display of the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8D). Resetting the indication of progress (e.g., 810) while maintaining display of the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG.
  • 8D in response to detecting that the first criteria are no longer met for a first period of time provides the user with more control of the device by helping the user avoid unintentionally leaving the health monitoring application while simultaneously allowing the user to easily continue with the recording without having to manually re-initiate the recording or the health monitoring application.
  • Providing additional control of the device enhances the operability of the device and makes the user- device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device (e.g., 800A) replaces (920) display of the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8D) with the first user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8A). Replacing display of the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8D) with the first user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG.
  • the first user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8 A) includes a graphical animation (e.g., of a shape, such as a heart, 808 of FIG. 8A) indicating (to the user) that the first electronic device (e.g., 800A) is ready to detect biometric information, where the graphical animation is comprised of a plurality of moving objects (e.g., 808, circular dots) forming a first shape (e.g., a heart shape).
  • a graphical animation e.g., of a shape, such as a heart, 808 of FIG.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • the first electronic device e.g. 800A
  • the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the plurality of moving objects (e.g., 808) of the graphical animation transitions from the first shape (e.g., a heart shape) to a second shape (e.g., a grid shape) different from the first shape as the display transitions from the first user interface to the second user interface.
  • first shape e.g., a heart shape
  • second shape e.g., a grid shape
  • the first electronic device transitions the plurality of moving objects (e.g., 808) of the graphical animation to an interstitial shape between the first shape (e.g., a heart shape) and the second shape (e.g., a grid shape).
  • the first electronic device displays, within the graphical animation that is in the second shape (e.g., 808 of FIG. 8D, a grid), a visual representation of the recorded biometric information, where the recorded biometric information is filtered and scaled such that the visual representation of the recorded biometric information can be displayed within the graphical animation. Displaying the visual representation of the recorded biometric information while displaying the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG.
  • the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8D) includes a (dynamic) graphical representation (e.g., a dynamic tachogram-like animation) that corresponds to a visualization of the biometric information from the recorded biometric information and a (countdown) timer (e.g., 810) indicating (to the user) the amount of time remaining to complete the recording of the biometric information.
  • a (dynamic) graphical representation e.g., a dynamic tachogram-like animation
  • a (countdown) timer e.g., 810 indicating (to the user) the amount of time remaining to complete the recording of the biometric information.
  • the biometric information that is recorded is heart-related data
  • the graphical representation is a dynamic animation that includes a tachogram to reflect the data obtained from the biometric sensor (e.g., 804).
  • the first electronic device while recording the biometric information, the first electronic device (e.g., 800A) detects, via the one or more input devices, that second criteria are met. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the second criteria are met, the first electronic device (e.g., 800A) displays, in the second user interface (e.g., 806 of
  • FIG. 8D below the indication of progress 810), a (text) notification (e.g., 824) related to the second criteria.
  • Displaying, on the second user interface (e.g., 806 of FIG. 8D), the notification (e.g., 824) related to the second criteria in response to detecting that the second criteria are met provides the user with more control of the device by quickly indicating to the user that one or more actions need to be taken by the user to maintain a recording.
  • Providing additional control of the device enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the second criteria is met when an amount of movement (of the device caused by the user) above a threshold is detected, and the notification (e.g.,
  • the notification indicates (to the user) that the amount of movement should be decreased.
  • the notification e.g., 844) notifies the user that too much movement is detected.
  • the notification e.g., 844) further notifies the user to constrain his/her movements.
  • the second criteria is met when the amount of movement (of the device caused by the user) above the threshold is detected for at least a third period of time, and the notification (e.g., 846) indicates (to the user) that the first electronic device should be moved to a resting position (e.g., on a table).
  • the notification e.g., 846 instructs the user to rest his/her arm on a table.
  • the second criteria is met when a second input (e.g., a press input, a click input) having a type that is different from the type of the first input is detected on a first input device (e.g., 804, a crown, a mechanical button, a rotating button), and the notification (e.g., 848) indicates (to the user) that the second input should not be repeated on the first input device.
  • the biometric sensor includes one or more electrodes integrated in the first input device (e.g., 804) (e.g., operating in conjunction with one or more electrodes integrated in a housing portion (e.g., backplate) of the first electronic device (e.g., 800A).
  • the second input is a press/click input on the first input device (e.g., 804), and the notification (e.g., 848) notifies that the user should not press/click the first input device (e.g., 804).
  • the second criteria is met when the first input is no longer detected (e.g., discontinued, interrupted) by the biometric sensor (e.g., 804) when recording of the biometric information is not yet completed, and the notification (e.g., 850) indicates (to the user) that the first input should be maintained on the biometric sensor (e.g., 804).
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • the notification (e.g., 850) instructs the user to re-establish contact with (e.g., by placing his/her finger back on) the biometric sensor (e.g., 804).
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • a second electronic device e.g., 800B, a smartphone paired with the smartwatch
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A detects (924) (e.g., via a second biometric sensor that measures heart rate information without user input) heart rate information (of the user) for a predetermined amount of time.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • the first electronic device displays (926), on the display (e.g., 802), a notification indicating a high heart rate.
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 802), the notification indicating the high heart rate in accordance with the determination that the detected heart rate information meets the first condition improves visual feedback by quickly informing the user of the high heart rate.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device detects (928), via the one or more input devices, a user activation of the notification.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 800A
  • method 700 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 900.
  • method 1100 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 900.
  • method 1300 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 900.
  • method 1500 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 900. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.
  • FIG. 10A-10J illustrate exemplary user interfaces for health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the exemplary user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 11.
  • the exemplary user interfaces in these figures relate generally to monitoring health using recorded biometric information, and are not limited to a specific type of biometric
  • ECG ECG
  • FIG.10A illustrates a first electronic device 1000 (e.g., corresponding to second electronic device 600B, first electronic device 800A).
  • first electronic device 1000A is a smartwatch.
  • first electronic device 1000A has a display 1002 and one or more input devices (e.g., including a touch layer of display 1002 and one or more mechanical buttons, such as a rotating crown).
  • first electronic device 1000 includes one or more biometric sensors (e.g., for recording ECG information, for detecting heart rhythm and heart rate of the user) comprising one or more electrodes integrated in an input device 1004 (e.g., a mechanical input device, such as a depressible, rotating crown) of first electronic device 1000.
  • an input device 1004 e.g., a mechanical input device, such as a depressible, rotating crown
  • the one or more biometric sensors of first electronic device 1000 further comprise one or more electrodes of (e.g., integrated in) a housing portion (e.g., the backplate) of first electronic device 1000, where the one or more electrodes integrated in the input device operate in conjunction with the one or more electrodes of the housing portion to capture biometric information (e.g., ECG information).
  • biometric information e.g., ECG information
  • first electronic device 1000 is configured to detect and respond to activation of input device 1004 (e.g., respond by performing a first predefined operation or a second predefined operation), where the activation is different from and independent of the capture of biometric information (e.g., ECG information).
  • biometric information e.g., ECG information
  • FIG. 10A illustrates first electronic device 1000 displaying, on display 1002, a user interface 1006 of an ECG application (e.g., corresponding to user interface 644 of the ECG application described with reference to FIGS. 6A-6AE and user interface 806 of the ECG application described with reference to FIGS. 8A-8S).
  • the ECG application is configured to cause first electronic device 1000 to capture biometric information without detecting the activation of input device 1004.
  • user interface 1006 includes an animation 1008 (e.g., a fluid animation, corresponding to animation 646 of user interface 644 and animation 808 of user interface 806) that depicts a particular shape (e.g., a heart).
  • animation 1008 comprises a plurality of dynamic objects (e.g., circular objects) that form the particular shape (e.g., a heart), where the shape appears three-dimensional and is visually fluid as the plurality of dynamic objects constantly move while maintaining the structure of the shape.
  • the plurality of dynamic objects forming animation 1008 have a consistent visual characteristic (e.g., the same color).
  • notification message 1010 instructs the user of the type of input (e.g., a touch or contact on input device 1004 that is below a threshold amount such that the input does not“click” input device 1004) and that the input must be maintained on input device 1004 (e.g., for the duration of the recording).
  • first electronic device 1000 while displaying user interface 1006 of the ECG application as shown in FIG. 10 A, first electronic device 1000 detects a press input 1001 on input device 1004, where the press input is an input on input device 1004 with a pressing force above a threshold amount such that the input“clicks” input device 1004.
  • first electronic device 1000 in response to detecting press input 1001 while displaying user interface 1006 of the ECG application as shown in FIG. 10 A, first electronic device 1000 displays, on display 1002 (e.g., replaces display of user interface 1006 with), a home user interface 1012 (e.g., a main user interface of the operating system of the device), as shown in FIG. 10B.
  • home user interface 1012 includes a plurality of icons corresponding to different applications installed on the device, including an icon 1014 corresponding to the ECG application.
  • FIG. 10C illustrates first electronic device 1000, while displaying user interface 1006 of the ECG application, detecting (and maintaining) a user input 1003 (e.g., a continuous touch or contact of a finger on input device 1000) on input device 1004 to begin an ECG recording (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 8A-8C).
  • a user input 1003 e.g., a continuous touch or contact of a finger on input device 1000
  • the dynamic plurality of objects e.g., circular objects
  • animation 1008 transitions from their initial fluid shape in FIG. 10A to a grid-like shape.
  • the device upon beginning the ECG recording, displays, in user interface 1006, a timer 1016 (e.g., below animation 1010) indicating the remaining amount of time to complete the recording (e.g., initially 30 seconds).
  • a timer 1016 e.g., below animation 1010
  • the device upon beginning the ECG recording, displays, in user interface 1006 (e.g., below timer 1016), a notification message 1018 (e.g., stating“Touch the crown and try to hold still”) requesting that the user maintain (a stable) user input 1003 on input device 1004 during the recording of the ECG information.
  • FIG. 10D illustrates first electronic device 1000 recording ECG information from the user, where a initial threshold time period (e.g., 5 seconds) has not passed since the initiation of the recording (e.g., as indicated by timer 1016, which shows that 3 seconds have passed since the initiation of the recording).
  • a initial threshold time period e.g., 5 seconds
  • first electronic device 1000 detects a press input 1005 on input device 1004, where the press input is an input on input device 1004 with a pressing force above a threshold amount such that the input“clicks” input device 1004.
  • first electronic device 1000 in response to detecting press input 1005 on input device 1004 while the initial threshold time period has not yet passed, first electronic device 1000 (automatically) terminates the recording and displays user interface 1006 of the ECG application as shown in FIG. 10 A.
  • FIG. 10E illustrates first electronic device recording ECG information from the user, where the initial threshold time period (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed since the initiation of the recording (e.g., as indicated by timer 1016, which shows that 6 seconds have passed since the initiation of the recording).
  • first electronic device 1000 detects a press input 1007 (e.g., similar to press input 1005) on input device 1004, where the press input is an input on input device 1004 with a pressing force above a threshold amount such that the input“clicks” input device 1004.
  • first electronic device 1000 in response to detecting press input 1007 on input device 1004 after the initial threshold time period (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed, first electronic device 1000 does not terminate the recording. In some embodiments, (instead of terminating the recording) first electronic device 1000 displays, in user interface 1006, a notification message 1020 (e.g., stating“You do not need to click the crown”) indicating that there is no need to“click” input device 1004 during the recording or to successfully complete the recording.
  • a notification message 1020 e.g., stating“You do not need to click the crown
  • the device detects a second press input (e.g., similar to press input 1007) after detecting press input 1007 but before a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) has passed since detecting press input 1007.
  • a predetermined amount of time e.g. 2.5 seconds
  • first electronic device 1000 in response to detecting the second press input after detecting press input 1007 but before the predetermined amount of time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) has passed since detecting press input 1007, first electronic device 1000 (automatically) terminates the recording and displays user interface 1006 of the ECG application as shown in FIG. 10A.
  • the device detects a second press input (e.g., similar to press input 1007) after detecting press input 1007 and after a second press input (e.g., similar to press input 1007)
  • first electronic device 1000 displays, in user interface 1006, a notification message 1020 (e.g., stating“You do not need to click the crown”) indicating that there is no need to“click” input device 1004 during the recording or to successfully complete the recording.
  • a notification message 1020 e.g., stating“You do not need to click the crown” indicating that there is no need to“click” input device 1004 during the recording or to successfully complete the recording.
  • termination of recording occurs if two inputs are received within a predetermined period (e.g., within rapid succession (e.g., within 2.5 seconds)).
  • the predetermined period e.g., within 2.5 seconds
  • FIG. 10F illustrates first electronic device 1000 performing an ECG recording on the ECG application with, as indicated by timer 1016 of user interface 1006 (e.g., showing “20 Seconds”), 20 seconds remaining to complete the recording.
  • the initial threshold time period e.g., 5 seconds
  • the initial threshold time period has passed since the initiation of the recording.
  • first electronic device 1000 detects a user input a press input 1009 (or a press-and-hold input) on input device 1004, where the press input is an input on input device 1004 with a pressing force above a threshold amount such that the input“clicks” input device 1004 (e.g., and the pressing force is maintained for at least a period of time, such as 1 second).
  • a press input 1009 or a press-and-hold input
  • the press input is an input on input device 1004 with a pressing force above a threshold amount such that the input“clicks” input device 1004 (e.g., and the pressing force is maintained for at least a period of time, such as 1 second).
  • first electronic device 1000 in response to detecting press input 1009 on input device 1004 after the initial threshold time period (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed, first electronic device 1000 does not terminate the recording and displays, in user interface 1006, a notification message 1020 (e.g., stating“You do not need to click the crown”) indicating that there is no need to“click” input device 1004 during the recording or to successfully complete the recording.
  • the initial threshold time period e.g., 5 seconds
  • first electronic device 1000 detects a press a press-and-hold input 1011 on input device 1004, where the press-and-hold input is an input on input device 1004 with a pressing force above a threshold amount such that the input“clicks” input device 1004, and input device 1004 is“clicked” for at least a threshold period of time (e.g., 1 second).
  • a threshold period of time e.g. 1 second
  • first electronic device 1000 in response to detecting press-and-hold input 1011 on input device 1004 while the initial threshold time period has not yet passed, first electronic device 1000 (automatically) displays, on display 1002 (e.g., replaces display of user interface 1006 of the ECG application with), a user interface 1022 of a virtual assistant (e.g., a virtual assistant controlled by the operating system of the device), as shown in FIG. 10G.
  • a virtual assistant e.g., a virtual assistant controlled by the operating system of the device
  • FIGS. 10H-10J illustrate first electronic device 1000 receiving an electronic communication (e.g., a phone call, a text message, an email message) while the device is performing an ECG recording.
  • the received electronic communication e.g., a text message from“Jane Appleseed”
  • the electronic communication is received while first electronic device 1000 is performing an ECG recording (e.g., from user input 1013 on input device 1004.
  • FIG. 101 illustrates first electronic device 1000 displaying, on display 1002, a summary page 1028 of the ECG recording (e.g., corresponding to summary page 826 described with reference to FIGS. 8J-8K) upon completing the ECG recording.
  • first electronic device 1000 upon (or subsequent to) completing the recording (and displaying summary page 1028 corresponding to the recording), displays, on display 1002, a notification alert 1030 corresponding to the electronic communication (e.g., the text message from“Jane Appleseed”) that was received during the recording.
  • the device also provides one or more notification alerts corresponding to the received electronic communications upon (or subsequent to) completing the recording.
  • first electronic device 1000 upon (or prior to) beginning an ECG recording, automatically disables a wireless communication radio (e.g., a LTE connection) of the device. In some embodiments, upon (or in response to) completing the ECG recording, first electronic device 1000 automatically re-enables the wireless
  • first electronic device 1000 upon (or prior to) beginning an ECG recording, automatically disables a haptic feedback controller (e.g., a haptic actuator) of the device. In some embodiments, upon (or in response to) completing the ECG recording, first electronic device 1000 automatically re-enables the haptic feedback controller of the device.
  • a haptic feedback controller e.g., a haptic actuator
  • FIG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for using an input device for health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Method 1100 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600B, 800A, 1000) with a display and one or more input devices including a first input device with an integrated biometric sensor (e.g., a rotatable and depressible watch crown with integrated biometric sensors comprising one or more electrodes for detecting characteristics of the user’s heart).
  • Some operations in method 1100 are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.
  • method 1100 provides an intuitive way for managing health monitoring.
  • the method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing health monitoring, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
  • the first electronic device displays (1102), on the display (e.g., 1002), a user interface (e.g., 1006 of FIG. 10 A) of an application (e.g., a health application, such as a health monitoring application or a health data measurement application) for capturing biometric information (e.g., ECG data, BPM data, heart-related data) from the biometric sensor (e.g., 1004).
  • a health application such as a health monitoring application or a health data measurement application
  • biometric information e.g., ECG data, BPM data, heart-related data
  • the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) is configured to detect and respond to activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004, respond by performing the predefined operation or a second predefined operation), where the activation is different from and independent of the capture of biometric information.
  • the application is configured to cause the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) to capture the biometric information without detecting the activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004).
  • the first electronic device detects (1104) a first activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004, a pressing of the first input device, such as a rotating crown, past a threshold amount to cause a “click” of the crown).
  • a first activation of the first input device e.g., 1004
  • a pressing of the first input device such as a rotating crown, past a threshold amount to cause a “click” of the crown.
  • the first electronic device performs (1106) a predefined operation associated with the first input device (e.g., 1004) that interrupts capture of the biometric information (e.g., scrolling of a displayed content, exiting a currently active application, activation of a digital assistant function).
  • Performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device (e.g., 1004) that interrupts the capture of biometric information in accordance with the determination that the first activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004) was detected when the first criteria are met provides the user with more control of the device by enabling the user to interrupt the capture of biometric information in certain situations through an input on the first input device.
  • Providing additional control options without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 1000 continues (1108) to capture the biometric information without performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device (e.g., 1004).
  • Continuing to capture the biometric information without performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device (e.g., 1004) in accordance with the determination that the first activation of the first input device was detected when the first criteria are not met provides the user with more control of the device by enabling the user continue with the capturing of the biometric information in certain situations without having to manually re- initiate the recording process.
  • Providing additional control options without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls enhances the operability of the device and makes the user- device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device prior to capturing the biometric information (e.g., while displaying an introductory animation, such as animation 808 of main user interface 806 as shown in FIG. 8 A), the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) detects a second activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004), the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) performs the predefined operation (e.g., performing the predefined operation without determining whether capture of biometric information is occurring).
  • the predefined operation e.g., performing the predefined operation without determining whether capture of biometric information is occurring.
  • the predefined operation includes displaying, on the display (e.g., 1002), a predefined user interface (e.g., 1012, a homescreen that includes one or more affordances for launching an application).
  • displaying the predefined user interface e.g., 1012 includes closing or suspending any currently active or running application (e.g., the application for capturing biometric information).
  • the predefined operation includes displaying, on the display (e.g., 1002), a user interface (e.g., 1022) of a digital virtual assistant (e.g., by replacing display of the user interface (e.g., 1006) of the application for capturing biometric information).
  • a user interface e.g., 1022
  • a digital virtual assistant e.g., by replacing display of the user interface (e.g., 1006) of the application for capturing biometric information.
  • the first criteria are met when capturing the biometric information has occurred for less than a first threshold amount of time (e.g., 5 seconds).
  • the first electronic device detects (1110) a second activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004).
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the second activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004), in accordance with a determination that the second activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004) was detected within a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after detecting the first activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004), the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) performs (1112) the predefined operation associated with the first input device (e.g., 1004) that interrupts capture of the biometric information.
  • Performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device that interrupts the capture of the biometric information in accordance with the determination that the second activation of the first input device was detected within the predetermined time after detecting the first activation of the first input device provides the user with more control of the device and reduces the number of inputs needed to interrupt the capturing of the biometric information by allowing the user to quickly and easily interrupt the capturing of biometric information using the first input device.
  • Providing additional control of the device and reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the second activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004), in accordance with a determination that the second activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004) was detected after the predetermined time after detecting the first activation of the first input device (e.g., 1004), the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) continues (1114) to capture the biometric information without performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device (e.g., 1004).
  • the biometric information without performing the predefined operation associated with the first input device (e.g., 1004) in accordance with the determination that the second activation of the first input device was detected after the predetermined time after detecting the first activation of the fist input device provides the user with more control of the device by helping the user avoid unintentionally interrupting the capturing of the biometric information and simultaneously allowing the user to recognize that another and/or different input is required to interrupt the capturing of the biometric information.
  • the predefined operation associated with the first input device e.g., 1004
  • Providing additional control of the device enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device upon (or prior to) capturing the biometric information (e.g., heart rhythm information, heart rate information) from the biometric sensor (e.g., 1004), the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) automatically disables a haptic feedback controller (e.g., a haptic actuator associated with the first input device) of the first electronic device (e.g., 1000). In some embodiments, upon (or in response to) completing capturing the biometric information, the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) automatically re-enables the haptic feedback controller.
  • a haptic feedback controller e.g., a haptic actuator associated with the first input device
  • the first electronic device upon (or prior to) capturing the biometric information (e.g., heart rhythm information, heart rate information) from the biometric sensor, the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) automatically disables a wireless communication radio (e.g., LTE connection) of the first electronic device (e.g., 1000) and prevents a first type of notification (e.g., 1026, of a message, of an alert, a type of notification other than a timer notification) from being displayed, where the first type of notification includes a notification corresponding to an electronic communication (e.g., a text message, an email, a phone call) received while the capturing the biometric information.
  • a wireless communication radio e.g., LTE connection
  • a first type of notification e.g., 1026, of a message, of an alert, a type of notification other than a timer notification
  • the notifications that are prevented from being displayed do not include a timer notification.
  • the first electronic device e.g., 1000
  • method 700 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1100.
  • method 900 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1100.
  • method 1300 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1100.
  • method 1500 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1100. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.
  • FIGS. 12A-12S illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing aspects of health monitoring.
  • the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 13A-13B.
  • the exemplary user interfaces in these figures relate generally to monitoring health using recorded biometric information, and are not limited to a specific type of biometric information. Only for the sake of convenience, the exemplary user interfaces in these figures are described with reference to a type of biometric information— electrocardiogram (hereinafter“ECG”) information.
  • ECG electrocardiogram
  • FIG.12A illustrates a first electronic device 1200 (e.g., corresponding to second electronic device 600B, first electronic device 800A, and/or first electronic device 1000).
  • first electronic device 1200 is a smartwatch.
  • first electronic device 1200 has a display 1202 and one or more input devices (e.g., including a touch layer of display 1202 and one or more mechanical buttons, such as a rotating crown).
  • first electronic device 1200 includes one or more biometric sensors (e.g., for recording ECG information, for detecting heart rhythm and heart rate of the user) comprising one or more electrodes integrated in an input device 1204 (e.g., a mechanical input device, such as a depressible, rotating crown) of first electronic device 1200.
  • the one or more biometric sensors of first electronic device 1200 further comprise one or more electrodes of (e.g., integrated in) a housing portion (e.g., the backplate) of first electronic device 1200, where the one or more electrodes integrated in the input device operate in conjunction with the one or more electrodes of the housing portion to capture biometric information (e.g., ECG information).
  • biometric information e.g., ECG information
  • first electronic device 1200 displays, on display 1202, a summary page 1206 (e.g., corresponding to summary page 826 and summary page 1028) of an ECG application for a completed ECG recording, where the evaluation result of the completed ECG recording is a“regular rhythm” result, as indicated by indication 1208A of summary region 1208.
  • summary region 1208 also includes an indication 1208B of a heart rate reading (e.g., in BPM) of the completed ECG recording.
  • the device displays (e.g., maintains display of) an animation (e.g., corresponding to animation 808 shown in FIG. 8A, in its initial shape as shown in FIG. 8A) in the background of the summary page (e.g., in a lighter shade so that the summary page is easily legible to the user).
  • an animation e.g., corresponding to animation 808 shown in FIG. 8A, in its initial shape as shown in FIG. 8A
  • the summary page e.g., in a lighter shade so that the summary page is easily legible to the user.
  • summary region 1208 also includes a information affordance 1210 for viewing a detailed description about the respective evaluation result.
  • first electronic device 1200 detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1201 of information affordance 1210.
  • FIG. 12B illustrates first electronic device 1200 displaying, on display 1202, at least a portion of a information page 1212 that includes description about medical
  • first electronic device 1200 detects a scrolling input 1203 on input device 1204 (e.g., a rotating of input device 1204, a rotating crown) in the direction of the bottom of the page.
  • a scrolling input 1203 on input device 1204 e.g., a rotating of input device 1204, a rotating crown
  • the page can be scrolled via a scrolling touch gesture on the display.
  • first electronic device 1200 scrolls information page 1212 towards the bottom of the page.
  • FIG. 12C illustrates first electronic device 1200 displaying, on display 1202, the bottom portion of information page 1212 of the ECG application.
  • information page 1212 includes (e.g., at the end of the page), a return affordance 1214 for returning to the previous page of the ECG application.
  • first electronic device 1200 detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1205 of return affordance 1214. In response to detecting user activation
  • first electronic device 1200 again displays, on display 1202 (e.g., replaces display of information page 1212 with), summary page 1206, as shown in FIG. 12D.
  • first electronic device 1200 while displaying, on display 1202, summary page 1206, first electronic device 1200 detects a scrolling input 1207 on input device 1204 (e.g., a rotating of the input device, a rotating crown). In some embodiments, in response to detecting scrolling input 1207 on input device 1204, first electronic device 1200 scrolls summary page 1206 to reveal additional items of the page, as shown in FIG. 12E.
  • a scrolling input 1207 on input device 1204 e.g., a rotating of the input device, a rotating crown.
  • first electronic device 1200 scrolls summary page 1206 to reveal additional items of the page, as shown in FIG. 12E.
  • summary page 1206 includes a symptoms region 1216 that includes an affordance 1218 for associating (e.g., via user selection from a list of symptoms) one or more symptoms to the ECG recording represented by the summary page.
  • summary page 1206 includes a symptoms region 1216 that includes an affordance 1218 for associating (e.g., via user selection from a list of symptoms) one or more symptoms to the ECG recording represented by the summary page.
  • summary page 1206 includes a symptoms region 1216 that includes an affordance 1218 for associating (e.g., via user selection from a list of symptoms) one or more symptoms to the ECG recording represented by the summary page.
  • first electronic device 1200 in response to detecting a user selection of emergency contact affordance 1220, initiates a phone call to an emergency contact (e.g., 911).
  • an emergency contact e.g., 911
  • first electronic device 1200 while displaying symptoms region 1216 of summary page 1206, first electronic device 1200 detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1209 of affordance 1218 for associating one or more symptoms to the ECG recording. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user activation 1209 of affordance 1218, first electronic device 1200 displays, on display 1202 (e.g., replaces display of summary page 1206 with), a symptoms page 1222, as shown in FIG. 12F.
  • display 1202 e.g., replaces display of summary page 1206 with
  • symptoms page 1222 includes a selectable symptoms list 1224 that includes a plurality of symptoms options, of which one or more of the listed symptoms can be selected by the user from the list.
  • a symptom option of selectable symptoms list 1224 is a“Light headed or dizzy” option.
  • a symptom option of selectable symptoms list 1224 is a“Fainting or near fainting spells” option.
  • a symptom option of selectable symptoms list 1224 is a “Shortness of breath” option.
  • a symptom option of selectable symptoms list 1224 is a“Chest pain” option.
  • a symptom option of selectable symptoms list 1224 is an“Other” option (e.g., for indicating one or more symptoms that are not listed in the selectable symptoms list).
  • a symptom option of selectable symptoms list 1224 is a“None” option (e.g., for indicating that the user is not experiencing (or was not experiencing during the time of the ECG recording) any abnormal symptoms).
  • first electronic device 1200 while displaying, on display 1202, selectable symptoms list 1224 of symptoms page 1222, first electronic device 1200 detects (e.g., via touch inputs) a user selection 1211 of a first symptom option 1224 A (e.g., a“Shortness of breath” option) and a user selection of 1213 of a second symptom option 1224B (e.g., a“Chest pain” option).
  • a user selection 1211 of a first symptom option 1224 A e.g., a“Shortness of breath” option
  • a second symptom option 1224B e.g., a“Chest pain” option
  • first electronic device 1200 In response to detecting user selection 1211 of first symptom option 1224 A and user selection 1213 of second symptom option 1224B, first electronic device 1200 displays, in selectable symptoms list 1224, an indication 1226A (e.g., a marking of the option, such as a checkmark) of first symptom option 1224A and an indication 1226B (e.g., a marking of the option, such as a checkmark) of second symptom option 1224B, as shown in FIG. 12H.
  • user-specified symptoms can be added (via symptoms page 1222) to evaluation results that correspond to“regular” results, as is the case in FIGS. 12A-12H.
  • first electronic device 1200 detects a scrolling gesture (e.g., via a scrolling touch gesture, via a rotating input on input device 1204, a rotating crown) on symptoms page 1222 and, in response to the scrolling gesture, scrolls the page to reveal a bottom portion of the page.
  • symptoms page 1222 includes (e.g., at the bottom of the page) a return affordance 1228 for confirming the selection of symptoms from selectable symptoms list 1224 to associate with the ECG recording and for returning to summary page 1206.
  • first electronic device 1200 detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1215 of return affordance 1228.
  • first electronic device 1200 displays, on the display 1202, an alert page 1230, as shown in FIG. 121.
  • alert page 1230 includes an emergency contact affordance 1232 which, when activated by the user, causes the device to initiate a process for seeking immediate medical attention (e.g., by initiating an emergency call to an emergency contact, by initiating a 911 call).
  • alert page 1230 includes a return affordance 1234 for returning to summary page 1206 (e.g., without contacting an emergency contact).
  • first electronic device 1200 in response to detecting user activation 1215 of return affordance 1228, if none of the user-specified symptoms are determined to be“serious” symptoms (e.g., symptoms that may require immediate medical attention), first electronic device 1200 (automatically) displays summary page 1206 without displaying alert page 1230.
  • be“serious” symptoms e.g., symptoms that may require immediate medical attention
  • first electronic device while displaying, on display 1202, alert page 1230, first electronic device detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1217 of return affordance 1234 from alert page 1230.
  • first electronic device 1200 again displays, on display 1202 (e.g., replaces display of alert page 1230 with), an updated symptoms region 1236 (e.g., corresponding to previous symptoms region 1216) of summary page 1206, as shown in FIG. 12J, where updated symptoms region 1236 includes a list of the user-specified symptoms from selectable symptoms list 1224.
  • updated symptoms region 1236 further includes an edit affordance 1238 for returning to symptoms page 1222 to modify the user-specified symptoms from selectable symptoms list 1224.
  • the user-specified symptoms of an ECG recording cannot be modified (either at first electronic device 1200 or at a second electronic device paired to first electronic device 1200, such as a smartphone) upon leaving the ECG application while on that recording.
  • first electronic device 1200 while displaying updated symptoms region 1236 in summary page 1206 (after having received user-specified symptoms for the recording), first electronic device 1200 detects a scrolling input 1219 on input device 1204 (e.g., a rotating of input device 1204, a rotating crown) towards the bottom of summary page 1206. In some embodiments, in response to detecting scrolling input 1219 on input device 1204, first electronic device 1200 scrolls summary page towards the bottom of the page.
  • a scrolling input 1219 on input device 1204 e.g., a rotating of input device 1204, a rotating crown
  • FIG. 12K illustrates first electronic device 1200 displaying, on display 1202, a bottom portion of summary page 1206.
  • summary page 1206 includes an emergency contact affordance 1240 for initiating a process for seeking immediate medical attention (e.g., initiating an emergency call to an emergency contact, initiating a 911 call).
  • summary page 1206 includes a return affordance 1242 for confirming selections (e.g., user specified symptoms) made via summary page 1206 and for returning to a mina user interface 1244 of the ECG application (e.g., corresponding to user interface 644 described with reference to FIGS. 6A-6AE, user interface 806 described with reference to FIGS. 8A-8S, and user interface 1006 described with reference to FIGS. 10A-10J), as shown in FIG. 12L.
  • selections e.g., user specified symptoms
  • an indication of the evaluation result of an ECG recording e.g.,“regular,” “Atrial Fibrillation,”“high heart rate,”“low heart rate,”“inconclusive” is highlighted with a warning visual characteristic (e.g., a warning color, such as yellow) if the result is an abnormal result (e.g.,“Atrial Fibrillation,”“high heart rate,”“low heart rate”) different from a default visual characteristic (e.g., a default color).
  • a warning visual characteristic e.g., a warning color, such as yellow
  • an indication of the heart rate measurement of an ECG recording e.g., the BPM
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., a warning color, such as yellow
  • the indication of the evaluation result and the indication of the heart rate measurement are displayed with warning visual characteristic
  • FIG. 12M illustrates a full expanded view of an example summary page 1246 corresponding to a first ECG recording performed using first electronic device 1200.
  • the first ECG recording has an Atrial Fibrillation result (an abnormal result), as shown by an evaluation result indication 1248A (e.g., showing “Atrial Fibrillation”), with a normal heart rate (e.g., between 50-100 BPM), as shown by a BPM indication 1248B (e.g., showing“80 BPM”).
  • Atrial Fibrillation result an abnormal result
  • an evaluation result indication 1248A e.g., showing “Atrial Fibrillation”
  • a normal heart rate e.g., between 50-100 BPM
  • BPM indication 1248B e.g., showing“80 BPM”.
  • evaluation result indication 1248A is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Atrial Fibrillation” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow, instead of a default color) and BPM indication 1248B is not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“80 BPM” is displayed in a default color, such as white).
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., text“Atrial Fibrillation” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow, instead of a default color
  • BPM indication 1248B is not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“80 BPM” is displayed in a default color, such as white).
  • FIG. 12N illustrates a full expanded view of an example summary page 1250 corresponding to a second ECG recording performed using first electronic device 1200.
  • the second ECG recording has an Atrial Fibrillation result (an abnormal result), as shown by an evaluation result indication 1252 A (e.g., showing “Atrial Fibrillation”), with a high heart rate (e.g., over 100 BPM), as shown by a BPM indication 1252B (e.g., showing“120 BPM”).
  • Atrial Fibrillation result an abnormal result
  • an evaluation result indication 1252 A e.g., showing “Atrial Fibrillation”
  • a high heart rate e.g., over 100 BPM
  • BPM indication 1252B e.g., showing“120 BPM”.
  • evaluation result indication 1252A is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Atrial Fibrillation” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow, instead of a default color) and BPM indication 1252B is also highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text “120 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., text“Atrial Fibrillation” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow, instead of a default color
  • BPM indication 1252B is also highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text “120 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • FIG. 120 illustrates a full expanded view of an example summary page 1254 corresponding to a third ECG recording performed using first electronic device 1200.
  • the measured heart rate of the third ECG recording was too low (e.g., below 50 BPM) to check for Atrial Fibrillation.
  • An evaluation result indication 1256A e.g., showing“Heart rate under 50” of a summary region 1256 indicates a low heart rate result (an abnormal result) with a BPM indication 1256B (e.g., showing“46 BPM”) of summary region 1256 showing the low heart rate.
  • evaluation result indication 1256A is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Heart rate under 50” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow) and BPM indication 1256B is also highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“46 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., text“Heart rate under 50” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow
  • BPM indication 1256B is also highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“46 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • FIG. 12P illustrates a full expanded view of an example summary page 1258 corresponding to a fourth ECG recording performed using first electronic device 1200.
  • the fourth ECG recording has a regular rhythm result (a normal result, a non-Atrial Fibrillation result), as shown by an evaluation result indication 1260A (e.g., showing“Regular Rhythm”), with a high heart rate (e.g., over 100 BPM), as shown by a BPM indication 1260B (e.g., showing“120 BPM”).
  • a regular rhythm result a normal result, a non-Atrial Fibrillation result
  • an evaluation result indication 1260A e.g., showing“Regular Rhythm”
  • a high heart rate e.g., over 100 BPM
  • BPM indication 1260B e.g., showing“120 BPM”.
  • evaluation result indication 1260A is not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Regular Rhythm” is displayed in a default color, such as white) and BPM indication 1260B is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“120 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., text“Regular Rhythm” is displayed in a default color, such as white
  • BPM indication 1260B is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“120 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • evaluation result 1261 A of summary region 1261 indicates the abnormal heart rate result (e.g., by stating“Heart rate over 100,”“Heart rate over 150,”“Heart rate below 50”) while BPM indication 1261B is maintained.
  • evaluation result indication 1261 A is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Heart rate over 100” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow) and BPM indication 1261B is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“120 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., text“Heart rate over 100” is displayed in a warning color, such as yellow
  • BPM indication 1261B is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“120 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • FIG. 12Q illustrates a full expanded view of an example summary page 1262 corresponding to a fifth ECG recording performed using first electronic device 1200.
  • the measured heart rate of the fifth ECG recording was too high (e.g., over 150 BPM) to check for Atrial Fibrillation.
  • An evaluation result indication 1264A e.g., showing“Heart rate over 150” of a summary region 1264 indicates a high heart rate result (an abnormal result) with a BPM indication 1264B (e.g., showing“152 BPM”) of summary region 1264 showing the high heart rate.
  • evaluation result indication 1264A is highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Heart rate over 150” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow) and BPM indication 1264B is also highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“152 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., text“Heart rate over 150” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow
  • BPM indication 1264B is also highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“152 BPM” is displayed in the warning color, such as yellow).
  • FIG. 12R illustrates a full expanded view of an example summary page 1266 corresponding to a sixth ECG recording performed using first electronic device 1200.
  • the sixth ECG recording has a regular result (a normal result, a non- Atrial Fibrillation result), as shown by an evaluation result indication 1268 A (e.g., showing“Regular Rhythm”), with a normal heart rate (e.g., 50-100 BPM), as shown by a BPM indication 1268B (e.g., showing“80 BPM”).
  • an evaluation result indication 1268 A e.g., showing“Regular Rhythm”
  • a normal heart rate e.g., 50-100 BPM
  • BPM indication 1268B e.g., showing“80 BPM”.
  • evaluation result indication 1268A is not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Regular Rhythm” is displayed in the default color, such as white) and BPM indication 1268B is also not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“80 BPM” is displayed in the default color, such as white).
  • the warning visual characteristic e.g., text“Regular Rhythm” is displayed in the default color, such as white
  • BPM indication 1268B is also not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“80 BPM” is displayed in the default color, such as white).
  • FIG. 12S illustrates a full expanded view of an example summary page 1270 corresponding to a seventh ECG recording performed using first electronic device 1200.
  • the seventh ECG recording has an inconclusive result (e.g., due to a poor reading), as shown by an evaluation result indication 1272A (e.g., showing“Inconclusive”), with an inconclusive heart rate, as shown by a BPM indication 1272B.
  • an evaluation result indication 1272A e.g., showing“Inconclusive”
  • BPM indication 1272B e.g., showing“Inconclusive
  • evaluation result indication 1272A is not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“Inconclusive” is displayed in the default color, such as white) and BPM indication 1272B is also not highlighted with the warning visual characteristic (e.g., text“— BPM” is displayed in the default color, such as white).
  • summary page 1270 of an inconclusive results includes a text description explaining to the user why the evaluation was inconclusive.
  • FIGS. 13A-13B are a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing aspects of health monitoring, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Method 1300 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600B, 800A, 1000, 1200) with a display and one or more input devices (e.g., a rotatable and depressible watch crown with integrated biometric sensors (e.g., comprising one or more electrodes) for detecting characteristics of the user’s heart (e.g., 1204), a touchscreen of the display, a mechanical button, a biometric sensor).
  • Some operations in method 1300 are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.
  • method 1300 provides an intuitive way for managing health monitoring.
  • the method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing health monitoring, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
  • the first electronic device captures (1302) biometric information with a biometric sensor that is in communication with the first electronic device (e.g., comprising one or more electrodes integrated an input device (e.g., 1204) operating in conjunction with one or more electrodes of a housing portion (e.g., backplate) of the first electronic device).
  • a biometric sensor that is in communication with the first electronic device (e.g., comprising one or more electrodes integrated an input device (e.g., 1204) operating in conjunction with one or more electrodes of a housing portion (e.g., backplate) of the first electronic device).
  • the first electronic device displays (1304), on the display (e.g., 1202), a representation (e.g., 1208) of an evaluation of a medical characteristic (e.g., related to heart health) determined based on the biometric information (e.g., ECG data, BPM data, heart- related data) captured by the biometric sensor.
  • a medical characteristic e.g., related to heart health
  • biometric information e.g., ECG data, BPM data, heart- related data
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device upon (or prior to) capturing the biometric information with the biometric sensor, the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) automatically disables a wireless communication radio (e.g., RF circuitry 108, a LTE connection) of the first electronic device and prevents notifications (e.g., of a message, of an alert) from being displayed.
  • a wireless communication radio e.g., RF circuitry 108, a LTE connection
  • Automatically disabling the wireless communication radio of the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) and preventing notifications from being displayed enables the user to perform more accurate recordings of biometric information without manually disabling certain other functions of the device that may interrupt or interfere with the capturing of the biometric information.
  • Performing an operation without requiring user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the notifications that are prevented from being displayed do not include a timer notification.
  • the first electronic device upon (or in response to) completing capture of the biometric information, automatically re-enables the wireless communication radio (e.g., RF circuitry 108, a LTE connection) and allows notifications to be displayed.
  • the wireless communication radio e.g., RF circuitry 108, a LTE connection
  • Automatically re-enabling the wireless communication radio and allowing notifications to be displayed upon completing capture of the biometric information reduces the number of inputs required from the user to control the device by enabling the user to bypass having to manually re-enable the wireless communication radio and allow notifications to be displayed.
  • Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the medical characteristic includes a heart rhythm characteristic (e.g., a characteristic corresponding to 1208A) and a heart rate characteristic (e.g., a characteristic corresponding tol208B), and the displayed representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic includes a heart rhythm evaluation (e.g., a electrocardiogram evaluation, l208a) summary and a heart rate evaluation (e.g., a BPM reading, 1208B) summary.
  • a heart rhythm evaluation e.g., a electrocardiogram evaluation, l208a
  • a heart rate evaluation e.g., a BPM reading, 1208B
  • the heart rhythm evaluation summary (e.g., 1252A) is displayed with a first visual characteristic (e.g., a first color, a warning color such as yellow) and the heart rate evaluation summary (e.g., 1252B) is displayed with the first visual characteristic when the heart rhythm evaluation corresponds to an abnormal result and the heart rate evaluation corresponds to an abnormal result.
  • a first visual characteristic e.g., a first color, a warning color such as yellow
  • the heart rate evaluation summary e.g., 1252B
  • the heart rhythm evaluation summary (e.g., 1252A) with the first visual characteristic and the heart rate evaluation summary (e.g., 1252B) with the first visual characteristic when the heart rhythm evaluation corresponds to an abnormal result and the heart rate evaluation corresponds to an abnormal result improves visual feedback by enabling the user to quickly and easily recognize the out of the evaluation result and whether the evaluation result should be paid closer attention to (e.g., for further medical attention).
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the heart rhythm analysis evaluation (e.g., 1252A) corresponds to an abnormal result if an abnormal rhythm pattern is detected (e.g., signs of Atrial Fibrillation).
  • the heart rate evaluation (e.g., 1252B) corresponds to an abnormal result if the rate is greater than a high limit number (e.g., 100 BPM).
  • the heart rhythm evaluation summary (e.g., 1248A) is displayed with the first visual characteristic and the heart rate evaluation summary (e.g., 1248B) is not displayed with the first visual characteristic when the heart rhythm evaluation corresponds to an abnormal result (e.g., signs of Atrial Fibrillation) and the heart rate evaluation corresponds to a normal result (e.g., 60-100 BPM).
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the heart rate evaluation summary (e.g., 1260A) is displayed with the first visual characteristic and the heart rhythm evaluation summary (e.g., 1260B) is not displayed with the first visual characteristic when the heart rate evaluation corresponds to an abnormal result (e.g., BPM below 50 or above 100) and the heart rhythm evaluation (e.g., 1260A) corresponds to a normal result.
  • an abnormal result e.g., BPM below 50 or above 100
  • Displaying heart rate evaluation summary (e.g., 1260A) with the first visual characteristic and not displaying the heart rhythm evaluation summary (e.g., 1260B) with the first visual characteristic when the heart rate evaluation corresponds to an abnormal result (e.g., BPM below 50 or above 100) and the heart rhythm evaluation corresponds to a normal result improves visual feedback by enabling the user to quickly and easily recognize and differentiate between an abnormal result and a normal result, and whether an evaluation result should be paid closer attention to (e.g., for further medical attention).
  • an abnormal result e.g., BPM below 50 or above 100
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the heart rate evaluation summary (e.g., 1264A) is displayed with a first visual characteristic and the heart rhythm evaluation summary (e.g., 1264B) is displayed with the first visual characteristic when the heart rate evaluation corresponds to a highly abnormal result (e.g., BPM over 150 or below 50) such that a determination cannot be made on the heart rhythm evaluation.
  • a highly abnormal result e.g., BPM over 150 or below 50
  • Displaying the heart rate evaluation summary (e.g., 1264A) and the heart rhythm evaluation summary (e.g., 1264B) with the first visual characteristic when the heart rate evaluation corresponds to a highly abnormal result (e.g., BPM over 150 or below 50) such that a determination cannot be made on the heart rhythm evaluation improves visual feedback by enabling the user to quickly and easily recognize that the result corresponds to a highly abnormal result and that the evaluation result should be paid closer attention to (e.g., for further medical attention).
  • a highly abnormal result e.g., BPM over 150 or below 50
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device displays (1306), in the representation of the evaluation, an indication that the evaluation was inconclusive (e.g., 1272A).
  • the evaluation also includes a text description (e.g., 1270) explaining to the user why the evaluation was inconclusive (e.g., due to a poor reading from the biometric sensor).
  • Providing the text description explaining to the user why the evaluation result was inconclusive improves visual feedback and provides the user with more control of the device by enabling the user to easily understand why the evaluation result and inconclusive (e.g., such that the user can take a new recording that addresses a reason for the inconclusive result). Improving visual feedback to the user and providing additional control of the device (without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user- device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device detects (1308), via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., a sequence of one or more touch inputs on a touchscreen of the display (e.g., 1209, 1211, 1213)) to add user-specified symptoms (e.g., 1224) to the evaluation of the medical characteristic.
  • a sequence of one or more inputs e.g., a sequence of one or more touch inputs on a touchscreen of the display (e.g., 1209, 1211, 1213)
  • user-specified symptoms e.g., 1224
  • one or more symptoms are displayed in a list for user selection. Providing one or more symptoms as a list for user selection reduces the number of inputs required from the user to provide the one or more symptoms (e.g., allows the user to not have to type the one or more symptoms).
  • the user selects one or more symptoms from the provided list of symptoms.
  • the first electronic device while displaying, on the display (e.g. 1202), the representation (e.g., 1208) of the evaluation of the medical characteristic (e.g., a result of the evaluation, data from the evaluation, such as BPM), the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) detects, via a first input device (e.g., 1204), a scrolling input (e.g., 1207).
  • a first input device e.g., 1204
  • the scrolling input is a rotation of the rotating crown (e.g., 1207).
  • the first input device is the touch layer of the display and the scrolling input is a scrolling touch gesture on the display (e.g., 1202).
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting the scrolling input, scrolls a second user interface (e.g., 1206) that includes the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic. Additionally in such embodiments, the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays, on the display (e.g., 1202), an add-symptoms affordance (e.g., 1216) for adding the user-specified symptoms to the evaluation. Displaying, on the display (e.g., 1202), the add-symptoms affordance for adding the user-specified symptoms to the evaluation provides visual feedback by allowing the user to quickly recognize how to add one or more symptoms to an evaluation result.
  • an add-symptoms affordance e.g., 1216
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the user-specified symptoms include a first symptom (e.g., 1226B) corresponding to a serious symptom (e.g., a symptom that may require immediate medical attention), and a first representation of the one or more representations of user- specified symptoms corresponding to the first symptom is displayed with a first visual characteristic (e.g., a warning color, such as yellow).
  • a first visual characteristic e.g., a warning color, such as yellow
  • the user- specified symptoms include a second symptom (e.g., 1226A) corresponding to a non-serious symptom, and a second representation of the one or more representations of user-specified symptoms corresponding to the second symptom is displayed with a second visual characteristic (e.g., a non-warning color, a default color) that is different from the first visual characteristic.
  • a second visual characteristic e.g., a non-warning color, a default color
  • the evaluation of the medical characteristic is a normal result (no abnormalities detected, e.g., a normal result as discussed above with respect to method 700 and FIG. 6H) and the sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., 1209, 1211, 1213) to add the user-specified symptoms is detected while displaying the representation of the evaluation corresponding to the normal result.
  • one or more symptoms can be added to an evaluation with no abnormal results.
  • the first electronic device while displaying the representation (e.g., 1208) of the evaluation of the medical characteristic, the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) detects, via the one or more input devices (e.g., 1202), a user activation of an information affordance (e.g., 1210). In such embodiments, in response to detecting the user activation of the information affordance, the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays, on the display (e.g., 1202), text information (e.g., 1212) related to the evaluation.
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 1202), the text information (e.g., 1212) related to the evaluation in response to detecting the user activation of the information affordance provides more control of the device by enabling the user to easily access more information related to the evaluation result.
  • Providing additional control options enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the displayed text information related to the evaluation corresponds to the text information presented for the same type of evaluation during the onboarding process, as described in method 700 (e.g., FIGS. 6F-6L).
  • the first electronic device In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., 1209, 1211, 1213), in accordance with a determination that at least one of the user-specified symptoms meet respective criteria, the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays (1310), on the display (e.g., 1202), a first user interface (e.g., a Symptom Alert user interface 1230) that includes an affordance (e.g., 1232) that, when activated, initiates a process for seeking immediate medical attention (e.g., initiating an emergency call, initiating a 911 call).
  • a first user interface e.g., a Symptom Alert user interface 1230
  • an affordance e.g., 1232
  • the first user interface e.g., 1230
  • the affordance that, when activated, initiates the process for seeking immediate medical attention improves user control of the device by enabling the user to quickly and easily recognize that immediate medical attention may be necessary and enables the user to easily and conveniently initiate a process for seeking immediate medical attention.
  • Providing additional control options and reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., 1209, 1211, 1213), in accordance with a determination that (all of) the user-specified symptoms do not meet the respective criteria, the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays (1312), on the display (e.g., 1202), the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic and one or more representations of user-specified symptoms without displaying the first user interface (e.g., without displaying interface 1230). Displaying, on the display (e.g., 1202), the representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic and the one or more
  • representations of the user-specified symptoms without displaying the first user interface improves visual feedback by enabling the user to easily view the evaluation and the user-specified symptoms upon user selection of the symptoms.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device detects (1312), via the one or more input devices (e.g., 1204), a scrolling gesture (e.g., a rotation of a rotating crow (e.g., 1219), a scrolling input on the touch layer of the display).
  • a scrolling gesture e.g., a rotation of a rotating crow (e.g., 1219), a scrolling input on the touch layer of the display.
  • the first electronic device in response to detecting, via the one or more input devices, the scrolling gesture, displays (1314), on the display (e.g., 1202), an option for seeking medical attention (e.g., a selectable text allowing the user to initiate a process for contacting 911 (e.g., 1240)).
  • Displaying, on the display (e.g., 1202), the option for seeking medical attention in response to detecting the scrolling gesture improves user control of the device by providing the user with a quick and easy method for seeking medical attention, if the user determines that medical attention is needed.
  • Providing additional control options enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the first electronic device subsequent to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., 1209, 1211, 1213), the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) detects (1316) a user activation (e.g., 1221) of a confirmation button (e.g., 1242).
  • a user activation e.g., 1221
  • a confirmation button e.g., 1242.
  • the first electronic device in response to (or subsequent to) detecting the user activation of the confirmation button, transmits (1318) (e.g., via a wireless communication radio of the device) the evaluation of the medical characteristic from the first electronic device (e.g., 1200) to a second electronic device (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600A), a smartphone that is paired with the first electronic device) for display of a corresponding representation of the evaluation of the medical characteristic on the second electronic device.
  • a second electronic device e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600A
  • the user-specified symptoms (e.g., 1226 A, 1226B) cannot be modified after detecting the user activation of the confirmation button.
  • method 700 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1300.
  • method 900 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1300.
  • method 1100 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1300.
  • method 1500 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1300. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.
  • FIGS. 14A-14I illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing a health condition alert.
  • the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 15.
  • the exemplary user interfaces in these figures relate generally to providing a health condition alert, such as a heart condition alert, and are not limited to providing a specific type of health condition-related alert. Only for the sake of convenience, the exemplary user interfaces in these figures are described with reference to a type of heart-related condition— Atrial Fibrillation.
  • FIG.14A illustrates a first electronic device 1400A (e.g., a smartphone similar to first electronic device 600A) with a display 1402 and one or more input devices.
  • the one or more input devices include a touch layer of display 1402 for detecting touch input, one or more image sensors 1404 (e.g., a camera, a depth sensor), a first mechanical button 1406 configured to perform one or more operations (e.g., and including an integrated biometric sensor, such as a fingerprint sensor), and a second mechanical button 1408 configured to perform one or more operations.
  • first electronic device 1400A includes a wireless communication radio (e.g., for LTE, Bluetooth, WiFi connections).
  • first electronic device 1400A is paired with a second electronic device (e.g., a smartwatch).
  • the second electronic device corresponds to second electronic device 1400B described below with reference to FIGS. 14H-14J.
  • second electronic device 1400B includes a plurality of biometric sensors, including a biometric sensor (comprising one or more photodiode sensors) enclosed in a housing of the second electronic device and an integrated biometric sensor (e.g., integrated with an input device, such as a rotatable input device, of the second electronic device).
  • FIG. 14A illustrates first electronic device 1400A displaying, on display 1402, a first page 1410 of a setup process for performing initial setup of Atrial Fibrillation-detection management features (e.g., of an associated health application), where heart-related information (e.g., heart rhythm information) used to determine Atrial Fibrillation is captured using a second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B) paired with first electronic device 1400 A.
  • first page 1410 of the setup process includes a graphical indication region 1410A that graphically indicates (e.g., via a static image, via an animation) a function of the Atrial Fibrillation-detection management features (e.g., recording heart rhythm information).
  • first page 1410 of the setup process includes a text description region 1410B describing background information relevant to the use of the Atrial Fibrillation-detection management features.
  • first page 1410 of the setup process includes a date of birth entry field 1410C for receiving a user input corresponding to the user’s date of birth, where the user’s date of birth is used to determine whether the user meets a minimum age requirement (e.g., 22 years of age) to use the Atrial Fibrillation-detection management features.
  • date of birth entry field 1410C indicates (e.g., by stating “Required”) that the user’s date of birth must be entered in order to proceed with the setup process.
  • date of birth entry field 1410C includes scrollable month, day, and year fields.
  • first page 1410 of the setup process does not include date of birth entry field 1410C.
  • first page 1410 of the setup process includes (e.g., in addition to or alternatively to date of birth entry field 1410C) an age restriction message (e.g., stating“You must be 22 years or older”) indicating to the user that the user must meet the minimum age requirement.
  • an age restriction message e.g., stating“You must be 22 years or older
  • first page 1410 of the setup process includes an affordance 1410D for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • first electronic device 1400 A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1401 of affordance 1410D for proceeding with the setup process.
  • first electronic device 1400A displays, on display 1402, an error notification (e.g., stating“The Atrial Fibrillation-detection management features are not intended for use by people under 22”) indicating that the user does not meet the requisite minimum age requirement.
  • the error notification is overlaid on first page 1410 of the setup process.
  • the background of the display displaying first page 1410) is dimmed (thereby emphasizing the displayed error notification).
  • first electronic device 1400A in response to detecting user activation 1401 (and in accordance with a determination that the minimum age requirement is met), displays, on display 1402 (e.g., replaces display of first page 1410 with), a second page 1412 of the setup process, as shown in FIG. 14B.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates first electronic device 1400A displaying, on display 1402, second page 1412 of the setup process for enabling Atrial Fibrillation-detection management features.
  • second page 1412 of the setup process includes an animation region 1412A that graphically indicates (e.g., via a static image, via an animation) a feature of Atrial Fibrillation detection (e.g., that heart-related information can be captured at several different times during time period to determine whether Atrial Fibrillation exists).
  • second page 1412 of the setup process includes a text description region 1412B that describes how the Atrial Fibrillation-detection features are implemented (using a second electronic device, such as second electronic device 1400B).
  • second page 1412 of the setup process includes an affordance 1412C for proceeding with the setup process.
  • first electronic device 1400A while displaying second page 1412 of the Atrial Fibrillation- detection management setup process, first electronic device 1400A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1403 of affordance 1412C for proceeding with the setup process. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user activation 1403, first electronic device 1400A displays, on display 1402 (e.g., replaces display of second page 1412 with), a third page 1414 of the setup process, as shown in FIG. 14C.
  • third page 1414 of the setup process indicates to the user (e.g., via a text description) one or more limitations of Atrial-Fibrillation evaluation results that are determined from heart-related information captured using the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B) (e.g., using a biometric sensor of the second electronic device comprising one or more photodiode sensors).
  • third page 1414 of the setup process includes a list 1414A of one or more functional characteristics of the Atrial Fibrillation-detection features and/or medical characteristics that cannot be determined from the captured heart-related information (e.g., heart attack, blood clots/stroke).
  • third page 1414 of the setup process includes (e.g., at the bottom of the page), an affordance 1414B for proceeding with the tutorial.
  • first electronic device 1400A while displaying, on display 1402, third page 1414 of the setup process, first electronic device 1400A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1405 of affordance 1414B for proceeding with the setup process.
  • the device in response to detecting user activation 1405 of affordance 1414B, displays, on display 1402, a fourth page 1416 of the setup process, as shown in FIG. 14D.
  • FIG. 14D shows first electronic device 1400A displaying, on display 1402, fourth page 1416 of the setup process.
  • fourth page 1416 of the setup process includes a graphical indication region 1416A and a text indication region 1416B that provides instructions on how to view and manage Atrial Fibrillation-detection features when Atrial Fibrillation is determined based on heart-related information (e.g., captured at different times) captured using the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B).
  • heart-related information e.g., captured at different times
  • fourth page 1416 of the setup process includes a notification activation affordance 1416C (e.g., showing“Turn on AFib Notifications”) for enabling notifications on first electronic device 1400A and/or second electronic device 1400B when Atrial Fibrillation is determined (using heart-related information captured using the second electronic device).
  • first electronic device 1400A while displaying fourth page 1416 of the setup process, detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1407 of notification activation affordance 1416C.
  • first electronic device 1400 A activates
  • FIG. 14E illustrates first electronic device 1400A displaying, on display 1402, a heart data user interface 1418 of a health application associated with the Atrial Fibrillation- detection features (e.g., operating after activation of notifications as described with respect to FIGS. 14A-14D).
  • the health application is accessible via a
  • heart data user interface 1418 of the health application includes a heart rate affordance 1420.
  • heart rate affordance 1420 includes an indication of a range of the user’s heart rate measured (e.g., via second electronic device 1400B) during a certain period of time (e.g., today).
  • heart data user interface 1418 in response to detecting a user selection on heart rate affordance 1420, displays a graphical depiction of the heart rate information summarized by heart rate affordance 1420 within a graphical depiction region 1422 of the user interface (and further highlights the affordance with a particular visual characteristic, such as a different color, to indicate to the user that the heart rate affordance is currently selected by the user).
  • heart data user interface 1418 of the health application includes an Atrial Fibrillation affordance 1424.
  • Atrial Fibrillation affordance 1424 includes an indication of the number of heart-related readings taken during a certain period of time (e.g.,“Today (4 Readings)”) by the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B) (e.g., using a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors of the second electronic device).
  • Atrial Fibrillation affordance 1424 includes an indication of the number of heart-related readings taken during a certain period of time (e.g.,“Today (4 Readings)”) by the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B) (e.g., using a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors of the second electronic device).
  • Atrial Fibrillation affordance 1424 includes an indication of the number of heart-related readings taken during a certain period of time (e.g.,“Today (4 Readings)
  • Fibrillation affordance 1424 includes an information affordance 1424A for viewing and managing information about existing heart-related recordings taken by the second electronic device (e.g., using a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors) to detect Atrial Fibrillation.
  • FIG. 14E while displaying heart data user interface 1418 with Atrial
  • first electronic device 1400A detects (e.g., via a touch input) a user activation 1409 of information affordance 1424 A of Atrial Fibrillation affordance 1424.
  • first electronic device 1400A displays, on display 1402, an Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426, as shown in FIG. 14F.
  • FIG. 14F illustrates first electronic device 1400A displaying, on display 1402, an Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426.
  • Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426 includes an alert log indication region 1426 A indicating Atrial Fibrillation alerts (if any) that have been generated upon detection of the condition using the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B).
  • alert log indication region 1426A indicates (e.g., by stating“No data”) that alerts have not yet been generated for Atrial Fibrillation detection.
  • Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426 includes a recent analysis indication 1426B indicating the time(s) of one or more most recent measurements of heart-related information made by the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B) (e.g., using a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors of the second electronic device).
  • the one or more recent measurements shown in recent analysis indication 1426B only include heart-related information captured after an Atrial Fibrillation alert has been presented (if any) by first electronic device 1400A and/or second electronic device 1400B.
  • Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426 includes a show all affordance 1426C for viewing a record of all past measurements of heart- related information using the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B) (e.g., using a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors of the second electronic device).
  • the second electronic device e.g., second electronic device 1400B
  • a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors of the second electronic device.
  • Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426 includes an indication 1426D (e.g., a brief textual description) of how Atrial Fibrillation is detected by the second electronic device (e.g., second electronic device 1400B).
  • Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426 includes a learn more affordance 1426E for viewing additional information (e.g., expounding upon the description shown in indication 1426D) about the Atrial Fibrillation-detection features.
  • Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426 includes a disable notifications affordance 1426F for disabling notifications from being presented (on first electronic device 1400A and/or second electronic device 1400B) when Atrial Fibrillation is detected.
  • FIG. 14G illustrates first electronic device 1400A displaying, on display 1402, Atrial Fibrillation management user interface 1426 after two previous Atrial Fibrillation alerts have been presented at first electronic device 1400A and/or second electronic device 1400B, as indicated in alert log indication region 1426 A.
  • alert log indication region 1426A includes a first alert log 1428A corresponding to a first Atrial Fibrillation alert (upon a first detection of Atrial Fibrillation) and a second alert log 1428B corresponding to a second Atrial Fibrillation alert (upon a second detection of Atrial Fibrillation different from / separate from the first detection of Atrial Fibrillation).
  • an alert log (e.g., first alert log 1428 A and second alert log 1428B) includes a time at which the alert was generated.
  • first electronic device 1400 A in response to detecting a user activation of an alert log, displays, on display 1402, a detailed alert log page that includes more detailed information about the captured heart-related information corresponding to the alert log (e.g., heart rate information, separate non-contiguous number of times during which the heart-related information was captured).
  • FIG. 14H illustrates second electronic device 1400B (e.g., paired with first electronic device 1400A and including a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors for detecting heart-related information) displaying, on a display 1430, an Atrial Fibrillation notification 1432 corresponding to a received Atrial Fibrillation alert.
  • second electronic device 1400B e.g., paired with first electronic device 1400A and including a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors for detecting heart-related information
  • second electronic device 1400B in response to detecting a user activation (e.g., via a touch input on display 1430 or via a scrolling gesture (e.g., a rotation of a rotating input device of second electronic device 1400B or a scrolling input on display 1430 of second electronic device 1400B)) of Atrial Fibrillation notification 1432, second electronic device 1400B displays, on display 1430, an Atrial Fibrillation alert 1434, as shown in FIG. 141.
  • a user activation e.g., via a touch input on display 1430 or via a scrolling gesture (e.g., a rotation of a rotating input device of second electronic device 1400B or a scrolling input on display 1430 of second electronic device 1400B)
  • a scrolling gesture e.g., a rotation of a rotating input device of second electronic device 1400B or a scrolling input on display 1430 of second electronic device 1400B
  • Atrial Fibrillation alert 1434 includes an indication 1434A (e.g., a textual description) describing the reason for the alert (e.g., a detection of Atrial Fibrillation) and an explanation of the medical condition (e.g., Atrial Fibrillation) associated with the alert.
  • Atrial Fibrillation alert 1434 includes an indication 1434B listing the one or more times (corresponding to measurements of heart-related information taken by second electronic device 1400B (e.g., using a biometric sensor comprising one or more photodiode sensors)) during which Atrial Fibrillation was detected by the device.
  • indication 1434B includes (not shown in FIG.
  • Atrial Fibrillation alert 1434 includes an indication 1434C indicating that medical attention may be required (e.g., stating“If you have not been diagnosed with Atrial Fibrillation by a physician, you should discuss with your doctor”).
  • Atrial Fibrillation alert 1434 includes an indication 1434D warning that the user should not take a medical action (e.g., changing medication or treatments) without consulting a physician.
  • Atrial Fibrillation alert 1434 includes an ECG affordance 1436 for taking more detailed heart-related information using an ECG application of second electronic device 1400B (e.g., corresponding to the ECG application discussed above with respect to FIGS. 6A-6AE, 8A-8S, 10A-10J, and 12A-12S).
  • the more detailed heart-related information captured using the ECG application relates to the condition (e.g., Atrial Fibrillation) detected by second electronic device 1400B without using the ECG application.
  • the more detailed heart- related information is captured by one or more biometric sensors of second electronic device 1400B that comprise one or more electrodes of (e.g., integrated in) an input device (e.g., a rotatable and depressible input device) of second electronic device 1400B and one or more electrodes of (e.g., integrated in) a housing portion (e.g., the backplate) of second electronic device 1400B, where the one or more electrodes integrated in the input device operate in conjunction with the one or more electrodes of the housing portion to capture the more detailed heart-related information (e.g., ECG information).
  • an input device e.g., a rotatable and depressible input device
  • a housing portion e.g., the backplate
  • Atrial Fibrillation alert 1434 includes a dismiss affordance 1438 for dismissing the alert (e.g., without proceeding to the ECG application to record more detailed heart-related information).
  • FIG. 15 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for providing a health condition alert, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Method 1500 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600B, 800A, 1000, 1200, 1400B) with a display and one or more input devices (e.g., a rotatable and depressible input device with an integrated biometric sensor(s) (e.g., comprising one or more electrodes) for detecting characteristics of the user’s heart (e.g., 1204), a touch-sensitive surface, a mechanical button).
  • a device e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600B, 800A, 1000, 1200, 1400B
  • input devices e.g., a rotatable and depressible input device with an integrated biometric sensor(s) (e.g., comprising one or more electrodes) for detecting characteristics of the user’s heart (e.g., 1204), a touch-sensitive surface, a mechanical button
  • the device is operably connected to a plurality of biometric sensors (e.g., a physical activity tracking sensor; a sensor integrated into electronic device; a plurality of sensors discrete from the electronic device that are connected (e.g., wireless connected) to the device).
  • biometric sensors e.g., a physical activity tracking sensor; a sensor integrated into electronic device; a plurality of sensors discrete from the electronic device that are connected (e.g., wireless connected) to the device.
  • method 1500 provides an intuitive way for providing a health condition alert.
  • the method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managing a health condition, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
  • the electronic device e.g., 1400B
  • receives (1502) e.g., via an internal connection from an integrated sensor of the electronic device (e.g., 1400), via a wireless connection from a discrete sensor
  • first biometric information from a first biometric sensor of the plurality of biometric sensors.
  • the first biometric sensor comprises one or more photodiode sensors (e.g., enclosed in a housing of the electronic device).
  • the first biometric information comprises biometric information recorded at a first time and biometric information recorded at a second time different from (e.g., spaced apart from, non-contiguous with) the first time (e.g., a common time on a different day of the week).
  • the electronic device In response to receiving the first biometric information and in accordance with a determination that the first biometric information satisfies first criteria (e.g., because the first biometric information includes heart rate or rhythm information that is abnormal and, optionally, because during a predetermined period of time (e.g., 48 hours), the electronic device (e.g., 1400B) has detected a threshold number of readings (e.g., five readings) having indications of irregular heart rate or rhythm), the electronic device (e.g., 1400B) displays (1504), on the display (e.g., 1430), an alert (e.g., 1434) including a first affordance (e.g.,
  • detecting additional biometric information e.g., using an ECG application on the electronic device.
  • Displaying an alert that includes a first affordance for detecting additional biometric information in response to receiving the first biometric information and in accordance with a determination that the first biometric information satisfies first criteria improves visual feedback by quickly (and in an easily-recognizable method) indicating to the user that an action (e.g., measuring additional biometric information) can be taken on the device.
  • the biometric information relates to heart-related information.
  • the first criteria comprises abnormal heart rhythm information.
  • the alert (e.g., 1434) includes one or more times (e.g., 1434B) during which the first biometric information was recorded by the electronic device.
  • the alert includes an indication (e.g., 1434A, a text description) of a medical condition (e.g., abnormal heart rhythm, Atrial Fibrillation) identified based on the first biometric information.
  • the alert includes an indication (e.g., 1434C, a text description) to seek medical attention. Including an indication to seek medical attention enhances the operability of the device by quickly and efficiently indicating to the user an action relating to information provided by the device can be taken.
  • Enhancing the operability of the device makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the electronic device receives (1506), via the one or more input devices, user activation of the first affordance (e.g., 1436).
  • the electronic device receives (1512) (e.g., using the ECG application) second biometric information (e.g., more detailed heart rhythm information, ECG information) associated with the first biometric information from (at least) a second biometric sensor (e.g., a biometric sensor integrated with an input device (e.g., 636, 804, 1004, 1204, such as a rotatable input device) of the plurality of biometric sensors that is different from the first biometric sensor.
  • second biometric sensor e.g., a biometric sensor integrated with an input device (e.g., 636, 804, 1004, 1204, such as a rotatable input device) of the plurality of biometric sensors that is different from the first biometric sensor.
  • the second biometric sensor is integrated with a first input device (e.g., 636, 804, 1004, 1204, a rotatable and depressible input device) of the one or more input devices.
  • a first type of input on the first input device e.g., 629, 801, 1005, such as a non-press input or a contact input, activates a feature(s) associated with activation of the second biometric sensor but does not activate a feature(s) associated with activation of the first input device.
  • the electronic device in response to receiving the user activation of the first affordance (e.g., 1436) and prior to receiving the second biometric information, displays (1508), on the display (e.g., 1430), a first application (e.g., 806, 1006, an ECG application) associated with receiving the second biometric information.
  • a first application e.g., 806, 1006, an ECG application
  • Displaying the first application associated with receiving the second biometric information in response to receiving the user activation of the first affordance and prior to receiving the second biometric information improves visual feedback by enabling the user to quickly and easily recognize that the second biometric information to be captured relates to features of the first application.
  • Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • the electronic device subsequent to displaying the first application (e.g., 806, 1006, an ECG application) and prior to receiving the second biometric information, the electronic device (e.g., 1400B) detects (1510) a user input (e.g., 629, 801, 1005, a non-press input, a contact input) on a first input device (e.g., 636, 804, 1004, 1204, a rotatable and depressible input device) of the one or more input devices, where the second biometric sensor is integrated with the first input device. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input, the electronic device receives the second biometric information from the second biometric sensor.
  • a user input e.g., 629, 801, 1005, a non-press input, a contact input
  • a first input device e.g., 636, 804, 1004, 1204, a rotatable and depressible input device
  • the second biometric information is received from the second biometric sensor while the user input (e.g., 629, 801, 1005, a non-press input, a contact input) is maintained on the first input device (e.g., 636, 804, 1004, 1204, a rotatable and depressible input device).
  • the electronic device in response to detecting that the user input is no longer maintained on the first input device, the electronic device (e.g., 1400B) ceases receiving the second biometric information from the second biometric sensor.
  • the electronic device resumes receiving the second biometric information from the second biometric sensor.
  • method 700 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1500.
  • method 900 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1500.
  • method 1100 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1500.
  • method 1300 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1500. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.
  • this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person.
  • personal information data can include demographic data, location-based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, home addresses, or any other identifying information.
  • the present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users.
  • the personal information data can be used to deliver targeted content that is of greater interest to the user. Accordingly, use of such personal information data enables calculated control of the delivered content. Further, other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure.
  • the present disclosure further contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices.
  • such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure.
  • personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection should occur only after receiving the informed consent of the users.
  • such entities would take any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices.
  • the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data.
  • the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to“opt in” or“opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services.
  • users can select not to provide location information for targeted content delivery services.
  • users can select to not provide precise location information, but permit the transfer of location zone information.
  • the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data.
  • content can be selected and delivered to users by inferring preferences based on non-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personal information, such as the content being requested by the device associated with a user, other non-personal information available to the content delivery services, or publically available information.
  • the described embodiments relate generally to a watch or other electronic device (e.g., another type of wearable electronic device). More particularly, the described embodiments relate to techniques for providing, on a watch or other wearable electronic device, electrodes for sensing biological parameters.
  • the electrodes may be variously provided on a crystal surface, crown, button, or housing member of the watch or other electronic device.
  • a watch or other electronic device may include a set of sensors for determining a set of biological parameters of a user that wears the watch or other electronic device.
  • Circuitry associated with the set of sensors may generate, for example, electrical signals (or values) corresponding to voltages at, forces applied to, or amounts of light incident on, the sensors.
  • the various signals or values may be correlated to, or used to derive, various biological parameters of the user, such as a heart rate of the user.
  • Embodiments of the systems, devices, methods, and apparatus described in the present disclosure are directed to a watch or other electronic device (e.g ., another type of wearable electronic device) having a set of one or more electrodes that may be used to sense or determine biological parameters of a user that wears the watch or other electronic device.
  • the biological parameters may include, for example, an echocardiogram (ECG) for the user.
  • ECG echocardiogram
  • the present disclosure describes an electronic device.
  • the electronic device includes a housing, which housing includes a crystal.
  • the crystal has a first surface interior to the electronic device and a second surface exterior to the electronic device.
  • a physical vapor deposition (PVD) deposited thin film first electrode is on the second surface of the crystal.
  • the electronic device also includes a second electrode that is positioned to be contacted by a finger of a user of the electronic device while the first electrode is positioned against skin of the user.
  • the electronic device includes a processor operable to determine a biological parameter of the user based on voltages at the first electrode and the second electrode while the user is in contact with the first electrode and the second electrode.
  • the present disclosure describes a watch body.
  • the watch body has a housing that includes a crystal.
  • the crystal has a first surface interior to the watch body, and a second surface exterior to the watch body.
  • a crown assembly associated with the watch body includes a shaft extending through an aperture in the housing and a user-rotatable crown attached to the shaft. The crown is exterior to the housing.
  • the electronic device includes a first electrode and a second electrode on the second surface of the crystal, and a third electrode on a surface of the user-rotatable crown.
  • the third electrode is positioned to be contacted by a finger of a user while the first electrode and the second electrode are positioned against a wrist of the user.
  • the electronic device includes a processor operable to determine a biological parameter of the user based on voltages at the first electrode, the second electrode, and the third electrode while the user is in contact with the first electrode, the second electrode, and the third electrode.
  • the electronic device includes a housing, a conductive rotatable shaft extending through an aperture in the housing, and a conductive crown that is mechanically and electrically connected to the shaft.
  • the crown is exterior to the housing.
  • the electronic device further includes a conductive shaft retainer, mechanically and electrically connected to the shaft, interior to the housing.
  • a spring-biased conductor is included in the electronic device.
  • the spring-biased conductor is in mechanical and electrical contact with at least one of the shaft and the shaft retainer.
  • a circuit, electrically connected to the spring-biased conductor is in electrical communication with the crown via the spring-biased conductor, the shaft retainer, and the shaft.
  • FIG. 1A shows an example of an electronic device that may incorporate a set of electrodes
  • FIG. 1B shows an example of a watch that may incorporate a set of electrodes
  • FIG. 2 shows an exploded view of components that may be attached to a crystal mounted in a back side housing member of a watch body
  • FIGS. 3A-3E illustrate an example of coatings that may be deposited on the interior and exterior surfaces of the crystal shown in FIG. 2;
  • FIG. 4 shows a cross-section of the crystal shown in FIG. 3B
  • FIG. 5 shows a cross-section of the crystal shown in FIGS. 3C and 3D;
  • FIG. 6 shows an example layer construction of an ITO-based electrode
  • FIGS. 7A-7C show alternative electrical connections between an electrode on an exterior surface of a crystal that forms part of a housing of an electronic device and an electrical contact interior to the electronic device;
  • FIGS. 8A-8D show alternative crystal configurations, and alternative attachments of crystals to other housing members of an electronic device
  • FIG. 9 shows the exterior surfaces (e.g ., the skin-facing surfaces) of the back side housing member and crystal shown in FIG. 2, with masks and electrodes applied to the crystal as described with reference to FIGS. 3A-3E, 4, 5, and 7A-7C;
  • FIG. 10 shows the sensor subsystem of FIG. 2 mounted on the crystal shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 11 shows an exploded view of a crown assembly
  • FIG. 12 shows an assembled cross-section of the crown assembly shown in FIG. 11;
  • FIG. 13 shows an elevation of a watch body capable of sensing a biological parameter;
  • FIG. 14 shows a cross-section of the crown assembly shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, as viewed from an edge of a watch body;
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic of an electronic device that may be used for acquiring an ECG or other biological parameter from a user of the electronic device
  • FIG. 16 shows an example method of determining a biological parameter of a user wearing a watch or other wearable electronic device
  • FIG. 17 shows a sample electrical block diagram of an electronic device such as a watch or other wearable electronic device.
  • cross-hatching or shading in the accompanying figures is generally provided to clarify the boundaries between adjacent elements and also to facilitate legibility of the figures. Accordingly, neither the presence nor the absence of cross-hatching or shading conveys or indicates any preference or requirement for particular materials, material properties, element proportions, element dimensions, commonalities of similarly illustrated elements, or any other characteristic, attribute, or property for any element illustrated in the accompanying figures.
  • the following disclosure relates to techniques for providing a set of electrodes 102 on the surface of an electronic device 100, as shown in FIG. 1A, and to techniques for using the set of electrodes to sense voltages or signals indicative of one or more biological parameters of a user who is in contact with the set of electrodes 102.
  • the set of electrodes 102 may be provided on one surface of the electronic device 100.
  • the set of electrodes 102 may include electrodes provided on different surfaces of the electronic device, such as a first electrode 102a provided on a first surface 104a of the electronic device 100, and a second electrode 102b provided on a second surface 104b of the electronic device 100.
  • Providing electrodes on different surfaces of a device may make it easier for a user to place different body parts in contact with different electrodes. For example, a user may place one or more of the electrodes 102 (including the first electrode 102a) in contact with their wrist, and may touch another one or more of the electrodes 102 (including the second electrode 102b) with a finger of their opposite hand.
  • a processor 106 of the electronic device 100 or a processor remote from the electronic device 100, may determine, from the voltages or signals (e.g ., from stored digital samples or values representing the voltages or signals), the biological parameter(s) of the user.
  • the biological parameter(s) may include, for example, an electrocardiogram (ECG) for the user.
  • one or two thin film electrodes may be PVD deposited on a transparent or translucent surface, such as a crystal or other structure, that forms part of a housing of an electronic device. More particularly, the electrode(s) may be deposited on a surface of the crystal that forms part of a housing for the electronic device.
  • an additional electrode may be positioned on a user-rotatable crown in a watch body, on a button of the watch, or on another crystal or non-crystal surface of a housing that defines the watch body.
  • the term“crystal” refers to any transparent, semi-transparent, or translucent surface made out of glass, a crystalline material (such as sapphire or zirconia), plastic, or the like, whether or not such material has a crystal atomic structure.
  • a crystalline material such as sapphire or zirconia
  • plastic or the like, whether or not such material has a crystal atomic structure.
  • the electrode(s) on the exterior surface of the crystal may be connected to electrical contacts within the electronic device by depositing the electrode material such that it wraps around an edge or perimeter of the crystal, and onto an interior surface of the crystal.
  • the electrical contacts may be on the interior surface of the crystal.
  • the electrode(s) may be formed on the exterior surface of the crystal, and thru-crystal vias that are filled or coated with a conductive material may connect the electrode(s) to electrical contacts within the electronic device.
  • the crown When an electrode is provided on a crown of an electronic device, the crown may be conductive or have a conductive surface, and the conductive portion of the crown may be coupled to a conductive rotatable shaft that extends through an aperture in a device housing. An end of the shaft interior to the housing, or a conductive shaft retainer interior to the housing, may be in mechanical and electrical contact with a spring-biased conductor that carries electrical signals between the shaft or shaft retainer and a circuit, thereby providing electrical
  • a processor of an electronic device may be operable to determine a biological parameter of a user based on voltages at various electrodes (e.g., at the set of electrodes 102).
  • the biological parameter may be an ECG for a user of the electronic device. For example, when a watch has a first electrode on an exterior surface of a crystal and a second electrode on a crown, the user’s fastening of the watch to their wrist may place the first electrode in contact with skin on the user’s wrist.
  • the user may touch a conductive portion of the crown with a finger on their opposite hand (e.g., the watch may be attached to a wrist adjacent one hand, and the crown may be touched with a finger of the opposite hand), thereby completing a circuit between the first electrode and the second electrode through the user’s arms and chest.
  • the watch may have a third electrode, also on the exterior surface of the crystal, which grounds the user to the watch.
  • the third electrode may be used to reject noise from ECG signals.
  • the electrodes may be positioned on different surfaces, or different portions of surfaces, in various embodiments.
  • the electrode(s) on the exterior surface of the crystal may be positioned at the periphery of the crystal, or otherwise positioned to enable a sensor subsystem to emit and receive light through the crystal.
  • the light may be emitted into, and reflected from, a user’s skin to determine other biological parameters of the user, such as a heart rate, blood pressure, pulse, blood oxygenation, glucose level, and so on.
  • FIGS. 1-17 These and other embodiments are discussed with reference to FIGS. 1-17. However, those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that the detailed description given herein with respect to these figures is for explanatory purposes only and should not be construed as limiting.
  • FIG. 1B shows an example of a watch 110 that incorporates a set of electrodes.
  • the watch may include a watch body 112 and a watch band 114.
  • Other devices that may incorporate a set of electrodes include other wearable electronic devices, other timekeeping devices, other health monitoring or fitness devices, other portable computing devices, mobile phones (including smart phones), tablet computing devices, digital media players, or the like.
  • the watch body 112 may include a housing 116.
  • the housing 116 may include a front side housing member that faces away from a user’s skin when the watch 110 is worn by a user, and a back side housing member that faces toward the user’s skin.
  • the housing 116 may include a singular housing member, or more than two housing members.
  • the one or more housing members may be metallic, plastic, ceramic, crystal, or other types of housing members (or combinations of such materials).
  • a crystal 118 may be mounted to a front side of the watch body 112 ( i.e ., facing away from a user’s skin) and may protect a display mounted within the housing 116.
  • the display may be viewable by a user through the crystal 118.
  • the crystal 118 may be part of a display stack, which display stack may include a touch sensing or force sensing capability.
  • the display may be configured to depict a graphical output of the watch 110, and a user may interact with the graphical output ( e.g ., using a finger or stylus).
  • the user may select (or otherwise interact with) a graphic, icon, or the like presented on the display by touching or pressing on the display at the location of the graphic.
  • the crystal 118 may form a part of the housing 116.
  • the crystal 118 may be a sapphire crystal.
  • the crystal 118 may also be formed of glass, plastic, or other materials.
  • the watch body 112 may include an additional crystal (not shown) that forms a part of the housing 116.
  • the additional crystal may have one or more electrodes thereon (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 2, 3C, 3D, 4-6, 7A-7C, 8A-8D, 9, 10, and 15).
  • the watch body 112 may include at least one input device or selection device, such as a crown assembly, scroll wheel, knob, dial, button, or the like, which input device may be operated by a user of the watch 110.
  • the housing 116 may include an aperture through which a shaft extends.
  • a crown 120 may be attached to the shaft, and may be accessible to a user exterior to the housing 116.
  • the crown 120 may be manipulated by a user to rotate or translate the shaft.
  • the shaft may be mechanically, electrically, magnetically, and/or optically coupled to components within the housing 116 as one example.
  • a user’s manipulation of the crown 120 and shaft may be used, in turn, to manipulate or select various elements displayed on the display, to adjust a volume of a speaker, to turn the watch 110 on or off, and so on.
  • the housing 116 may also include an aperture through which a button 122 protrudes.
  • the crown 120, scroll wheel, knob, dial, button 122, or the like may be conductive, or have a conductive surface, and a signal route may be provided between the conductive portion of the crown 120, scroll wheel, knob, dial, button 122, or the like and a circuit within the watch body 112.
  • the crown 120 may be part of a crown assembly as described with reference to FIGS. 11, 12, 14, and 15.
  • the housing 116 may include structures for attaching the watch band 114 to the watch body 112.
  • the structures may include elongate recesses or apertures through which ends of the watch band 114 may be inserted and attached to the watch body 112.
  • the structures may include indents (e.g., dimples or depressions) in the housing 116, which indents may receive ends of spring pins that are attached to or threaded through ends of a watch band to attach the watch band to the watch body.
  • the watch band 114 may be used to secure the watch 110 to a user, another device, a retaining mechanism, and so on.
  • the watch 110 may lack the crystal 118, the display, the crown 120, or the button 122.
  • the watch 110 may include an audio input or output interface, a touch input interface, a haptic (force) input or output interface, or other input or output interface that does not require the display, crown 120, or button 122.
  • the watch 110 may also include the afore-mentioned input or output interfaces in addition to the display, crown 120, or button 122.
  • the front side of the watch 110 may be covered by the crystal 118, or by a metallic or other type of housing member.
  • FIG. 2 shows an exploded view of components that may be attached to a crystal 204 mounted in a back side housing member 202 of a watch body.
  • the crystal 204 mounted in a back side housing member 202 of a watch body.
  • FIG. 2 shows the components in relation to a back side housing member 202 (i.e ., a skin-facing housing member) of a watch body such as the watch body 112.
  • the back side housing member 202 includes apertures 240 through which ends of a watch band may be inserted and attached to a watch body including the back side housing member 202.
  • a watch band may be attached to the watch body 112 in other ways.
  • a crystal 204 (e.g., a skin-facing crystal) may be mounted to the back side housing member 202 and form a part of the housing of a watch body (e.g., a part of the watch body 112).
  • the crystal 204 may have a first surface that is interior to the watch body and a second surface that is exterior to the watch body.
  • the crystal 204 has a round perimeter 206 and be fitted to a round aperture in the back side housing member 202.
  • the crystal 204 may have a perimeter that is square, oval, or some other shape.
  • the aperture in the back side housing member 202 may be square, oval, or some other shape.
  • the perimeter 206 of the crystal 204 and the perimeter of the aperture need not have the same shape (e.g., the perimeter of the aperture in the back side housing member 202 may be smaller and differently shaped than the perimeter 206 of the crystal 204).
  • the crystal 204 may be a sapphire crystal.
  • the crystal 204 may also be formed of glass, plastic, or other materials.
  • the crystal 204 may be transparent to all wavelengths of light or just some wavelengths of light.
  • the exterior surface of the crystal 204 may have a set of electrodes 242 thereon.
  • the electrodes 242 may be positioned at the periphery of the crystal 204 (or in other locations) to enable optical communication between a sensor subsystem 216 interior to a watch body and a medium ( e.g ., skin) exterior to the watch body.
  • the optical communication may occur through the crystal 204, and in some cases through a number of apertures formed in one or more masks 224 applied to the crystal 204.
  • Example constructions of the electrodes 242 and masks 224 are described with reference to FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A-7C, 8A-8D, 9, 10, and 15.
  • the electrodes 242 may be formed of a transparent material, as described with reference to FIG. 6, and the sensor subsystem 216 may transmit/receive light through the electrodes 242.
  • the interior components shown in FIG. 2 may be attached to (and in some cases mounted directly on) the first or interior surface of the crystal 204.
  • the components may include a lens 208, a light filter 210, one or more adhesives 212, 214, a sensor subsystem 216, circuitry or a processing subsystem 218, a magnet 220, or a magnetic shield 222.
  • the lens 208 may abut, be attached to (e.g., be mounted directly on), or formed on the first or interior surface of the crystal 204.
  • the lens 208 is aligned with the center of the crystal 204.
  • the inner or exterior surface of the crystal 204 may have a mask 224 thereon (e.g., an ink mask or dark mask, and in some cases a plurality of masks).
  • the mask 224 may define an aperture 226 (e.g., a first aperture or central aperture) that allows light of at least one wavelength to pass through the crystal 204, and the lens 208 may be aligned with the aperture 226.
  • the lens 208 may be or include a Fresnel lens, a spherical lens, a diffuser film, or the like.
  • the light filter 210 may include one or more segments 228, and each segment 228 may be attached to (e.g., laminated to) the interior surface of the crystal 204 and positioned on the interior surface (e.g., adjacent or around the lens 208) to prevent a set of one or more light receivers on the sensor subsystem 216 from receiving a portion of the light that is emitted by a set of one or more light emitters on the sensor subsystem 216.
  • the set of light emitters and set of light receivers are not shown in FIG. 2, and may be mounted to an underside of the sensor subsystem 216.
  • the mask 224 may further define a second aperture 230a, or a set of apertures 230 including the second aperture 230a.
  • the second aperture 230a or set of apertures 230 may be positioned adjacent or around the first aperture 226.
  • the segments 228 of the light filter 210 (or a light filter ring or other light filter configuration) may be aligned with ( e.g ., may cover) each of the apertures in the set of apertures 230.
  • FIG. 2 shows a mask 224 that defines a set of eight radial apertures 230 around a central aperture 226.
  • Each segment 228 of the light filter 210 may block (e.g., absorb) a portion of light emitted by a set of light emitters that is mounted on the sensor subsystem 216, which portion of light reflects from a surface too close to (or within) the crystal 204 (e.g., the exterior surface of the crystal 204, imperfections within the crystal 204, or a medium too close to the crystal 204), such that the reflected light is not useful in a sensing operation for which the sensor subsystem 216 is designed.
  • the sensor subsystem 216 when the sensor subsystem 216 is configured to determine a biological parameter of a user, light reflected from the crystal 204, or from the outer layer of skin of the user, may not have any relation to the biological parameter being determined and may not be useful.
  • the light filter 210 or segments 228 thereof may include at least one of a light control film, a light polarizer, an anti-reflective film, a reflective film, or a light absorber.
  • the mask 224 may represent multiple masks, and different masks may allow different wavelengths of light to pass through the crystal 204, as described for example with reference to FIGS. 3A-3E and 4.
  • the sensor subsystem 216 may include a substrate 232 on which the set of one or more light emitters (e.g., FEDs) and the set of one or more light receivers (e.g., photodetectors, such as photodiodes) are mounted.
  • the light emitter(s) and light receiver(s) may be mounted or positioned on the substrate 232 to emit and receive light through the crystal 204.
  • the sensor subsystem 216 may be attached to the crystal 204 by one or more adhesives 212/214, such as pressure sensitive adhesives (PSAs) or heat-activated films (HAFs).
  • PSAs pressure sensitive adhesives
  • HAFs heat-activated films
  • the set of light emitters may be centrally mounted on the substrate 232, and a first wall may be attached to ( e.g ., formed on or bonded to) an underside of the substrate 232 surrounding the set of light emitters.
  • the first wall may be attached to the interior surface of the crystal 204 using a first ring of adhesive 212.
  • the set of light receivers may be mounted on the substrate 232 around the set of light emitters, between the first wall and a second wall attached to (e.g., formed on or bonded to) the underside of the substrate 232.
  • the second wall may be attached to the interior surface of the crystal 204 using a second ring of adhesive 214.
  • the substrate 232 of the sensor subsystem 216 may include various contacts, pads, traces, or other conductive structures 234 that enable the processing subsystem 218 to be electrically coupled to the set of light emitters and set of light receivers of the sensor subsystem 216.
  • the processing subsystem 218 may include a substrate 236 (e.g., a printed circuit board (PCB)) that is mounted to the sensor subsystem 216, and thereby to the crystal 204, via the conductive structures 234 and/or additional adhesive between the substrates 232, 236 of the sensor subsystem 216 and the processing subsystem 218.
  • the substrates 232, 236 may also or alternatively be connected using mechanical fasteners (e.g., screws).
  • the processing subsystem 218 may activate the light emitters and light receivers to perform a sensor function (e.g., to determine a heart rate).
  • the processing subsystem 218 may be mounted to another structure within the watch body, and may be electrically connected to the conductive structures 234 of the sensor subsystem 216 by a flex circuit or other conductors.
  • the substrate 236 of the processing subsystem 218 may have a hole 238 therein, and the magnet 220 may be aligned with the hole 238 and abutted to (or mounted on) the substrate 232.
  • the magnet 220 may be adhesively bonded to the substrate 232 of the sensor subsystem 216.
  • the magnet 220 may inductively couple to a battery charger used for charging a battery included within the watch body, which battery may power components of the watch including the components of the sensor subsystem 216 and the processing subsystem 218.
  • the magnetic shield 222 may abut (or be mounted on) the magnet 220. In some cases, the magnetic shield 222 may be adhesively bonded to the magnet 220. The magnetic shield may direct magnetic flux associated with the magnet 220 toward and out the crystal 204 to improve inductive battery charging performance for a battery included within the watch body.
  • FIGS. 3A-3E illustrate one example of coatings that may be deposited on the interior and exterior surfaces of the crystal 204 shown in FIG. 2.
  • a first mask 300 e.g ., a first ink mask
  • IR infrared
  • visible light may be deposited (e.g., PVD deposited) on the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204.
  • the first mask 300 may include an inner ring 300a and an outer ring 300b that define a central first aperture 304 and a concentric second aperture 306 (7. e. , a second aperture 306 that is concentric with the first aperture 304).
  • the central first aperture 304 may be positioned above light emitters of the sensor subsystem 216 described with reference to FIG. 2 (and above the optional lens 208), and the concentric second aperture 306 may be positioned above light receivers of the sensor subsystem 216.
  • the inner ring 300a of the first mask may prevent the light receivers from receiving light that is unlikely to have passed through a user’s skin after passing through the central first aperture 304.
  • the outer ring 300b of the first mask may in some cases be provided for cosmetic reasons, and in some cases may not be provided.
  • FIG. 3B shows a second mask 308 (e.g., a second ink mask) that is opaque to visible light but transparent to IR light.
  • the second mask 308 may be deposited (e.g., PVD deposited) on the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204.
  • the second mask 308 may be deposited on the crystal 204 over the concentric second aperture 306 in the first mask 300, and may overlap the inner and outer rings 300a, 300b of the first mask, as shown in FIG. 4.
  • the second mask 308 may define a plurality of visible light apertures 310 above respective light receivers of the sensor subsystem 216, while allowing IR light to pass through the entirety of the concentric second aperture 306. This may increase the amount of IR light received by the light receivers.
  • the second mask 308 may also define an optional aperture above a condensation detector 312. In some cases, the second mask 308 may look visually similar to the first mask 300 (e.g., both masks may be dark masks, such that it may be impossible or difficult for a user to visually distinguish the first and second masks 300, 308).
  • FIGS. 3C and 3D show an example of PVD deposited first and second electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b on the interior and exterior surfaces 302, 316 of the crystal 204.
  • the first and second electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may be arc-shaped and positioned at the periphery of the crystal 204.
  • the first and second electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may be sized based on factors such as: providing a sufficient area to provide good electrical contact between the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b and skin (which may improve electrical sensor efficiency); providing electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b of a size that do not substantially interfere with an antenna or other electrical structures of a device (which may improve wireless communication efficiency); or providing electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b positioned to allow optical communication through the crystal 204 (which may improve optical
  • the first and second electrodes 314a, 314b may be separated from one another by a pair of gaps 3 l8a, 318b.
  • the first and second electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may be deposited on both the interior and exterior surfaces 302, 316 of the crystal 204 and may wrap around the edge (or perimeter) of the crystal 204.
  • the material used to form the first and second electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may be patterned to form electrical contacts 320a, 320b ( e.g ., tabs) on the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204.
  • the first and second electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may overlap the first mask 300 (or outer ring 300b of the first mask) on the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204, such that the first mask 300 is positioned between the first and second electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b and the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204.
  • the material used to form the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may need to have properties that enable the material to adhere to a crystal surface (e.g., a sapphire surface) and a mask (e.g., an ink mask).
  • the material or materials used to form the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may also have properties, singularly or in combination, such as: a low impedance and good conductivity (e.g., a low DC resistance); a low electrode-to-skin impedance; a high hardness to reduce scratching of the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b; a higher elastic modulus than the crystal 204 (e.g., to mitigate the likelihood that a crack in an electrode 314 propagates through the crystal 204); compatibility with an HAF or other adhesive; and good biocompatibility (e.g., not likely to cause an adverse reaction to a user of a device).
  • a low impedance and good conductivity e.g., a low DC resistance
  • a low electrode-to-skin impedance e.g., a high hardness to reduce scratching of the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b
  • a higher elastic modulus than the crystal 204 e.g., to mitigate the
  • FIG. 3E shows an example deposition of adhesive 322 on the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204.
  • the adhesive 322 may be deposited in inner and outer rings 322a, 322b, as described with reference to FIG. 2.
  • the inner ring 322a of adhesive may be positioned on the inner ring 300a of the first mask.
  • the outer ring 322b of adhesive may be positioned on the second mask 308, outward from the plurality of apertures 310 in the second mask 308.
  • the adhesive 322 may include a PSA or HAF.
  • FIG. 4 shows a cross-section of a portion of the crystal 204 shown in FIG. 3B, and illustrates an overlap between the first and second masks 300, 308.
  • the second mask 308 may overlap the first mask (e.g ., outer ring 300b) on the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204 such that the first mask 300 is positioned between the second mask 308 and the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204.
  • FIG. 5 shows a cross-section of the crystal 204 shown in FIG. 3C or 3D, and illustrates an overlap between the first electrode 3l4a (or second electrode) and the first mask 300 (e.g., outer ring 300b of the first mask).
  • the first electrode 3l4a may overlap the first mask 300 (or outer ring 300b of the first mask) on the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204, such that the first mask 300 is positioned between the first electrode 3l4a and the interior surface 302 of the crystal 204.
  • the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b shown in FIGS. 3C, 3D, and 5 may be formed using indium titanium oxide (ITO) or another transparent material.
  • the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may be transparent to light emitted by a sensor subsystem positioned below the crystal 204, and thus the electrodes 3l4a, 3l4b may extend over a greater portion (or all) of the exterior surface 316 of the crystal 204.
  • FIG. 6 shows an example layer construction of ITO-based electrodes.
  • the stack 600 may include a layer 602 of aluminum oxide (Al 2 0 3 ) on the crystal, a layer 604 of ITO on the layer 602 of aluminum oxide, a first layer 606 of silicon dioxide (Si0 2 ) on the layer 604 of aluminum oxide, a layer 608 of silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ) on the first layer 606 of silicon dioxide, a second layer 610 of silicon dioxide on the layer 608 of silicon nitride, and a layer 612 of diamond like carbon, or another hard coating, on the second layer 610 of silicon dioxide.
  • Al 2 0 3 aluminum oxide
  • ITO silicon oxide
  • Si0 2 silicon dioxide
  • Si 3 N 4 silicon nitride
  • FIGS. 7A-7C show alternative electrical connections between an electrode (e.g ., an electrode on an exterior surface of a crystal that forms part of a housing of an electronic device) and an electrical contact interior to the electronic device.
  • the crystals shown in FIGS. 7A-7C may have circular perimeters.
  • the crystals may have perimeters that are oval-shaped, square- shaped, rectangular-shaped, and so on.
  • the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 7A-7C can be applied to crystals having various perimeter shapes, to crystals having different compositions, and so on.
  • the features shown in FIGS. 7A-7C may be replicated to electrically connect more than one electrode on an exterior surface of an electronic device to components interior to the electronic device.
  • the electrode 700 may be a thin film electrode that is PVD deposited on a surface 702 of a crystal 704.
  • the surface 702 on which the electrode 700 is deposited may be a surface of the crystal 704 that is exterior to an electronic device (i.e ., the electrode 700 may be deposited on an exterior surface 702 of the crystal 704).
  • a conductive material used to form the electrode 700 may be deposited on the crystal 704 such that the material wraps around an edge 706 or perimeter of the crystal 704 to form an electrical contact 708 on a surface 710 of the crystal 704 that is interior to the electronic device (i.e., on an interior surface 710 of the crystal 704).
  • the electrical contact 708 may be a tab that traces a much smaller arc about the periphery of the crystal 704 than the electrode 700 (as shown, for example, in FIGS.
  • the electrical contact 708 may be arc-shaped and trace an arc that is similar in size to an arc traced by the electrode 700 on the exterior surface 702 of the crystal 704.
  • the conductive material(s) used to form the electrode 700 and electrical contact 708 may be deposited on the exterior surface 702, edge 706, and interior surface 710 of the crystal 704 in a single operation (or single set of operations in which the material(s) are deposited on the exterior surface 702, edge 706, and interior surface 710 of the crystal 704).
  • the material(s) used to form the electrode 700 may be deposited on the edge 706 or interior surface 710 of the crystal 704 in operations that are performed separately from one or more operations in which the electrode 700 is deposited on the exterior surface 702 of the crystal 704. In these latter examples, the material(s) may be deposited such that the materials overlap.
  • a set of one or more materials used to form the electrode 700 may differ from a set of one or more materials deposited on the edge 706 or interior surface 710 of the crystal 704.
  • the conductive material(s) deposited on the exterior surface 702, edge 706, and interior surface 710 of the crystal 704 may include a layer of erbium.
  • the layer of erbium may be coated with a layer of a stainless steel (SUS) or a layer of diamond like carbon (DLC).
  • SUS stainless steel
  • DLC diamond like carbon
  • only the electrode 700 or edge 706 of the crystal 704 may be coated with a layer of stainless steel or DLC.
  • the layer of erbium may be coated with a PVD deposited layer of Aluminum Titanium Nitride (AlTiN) or Chromium Silicon Carbonitride (CrSiCN).
  • one or more masks may be applied to the interior surface of the crystal (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 3A-3E, 4, and 5).
  • one or more of the conductive materials used to form the electrode 700 and electrical contact 708 may be applied over the mask(s).
  • the conductive material(s), and the manner in which the conductive material(s) are deposited on the crystal 704, may therefore be selected to ensure adhesion of the conductive material(s) to the crystal 704 and to the ink or other material used to form the mask(s).
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 710 of the crystal 704 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 712 in another housing member 714 of the electronic device (e.g., with the crystal 704 overlapping the housing member 714).
  • the crystal 704 may be attached to the housing member 714 using an adhesive 716, such as a heat activated film (HAF).
  • the adhesive 716 or conductive material(s), and the manner in which the crystal 704 is attached to the housing member 714, may therefore be selected to ensure adhesion of the crystal 704 to the housing member 714.
  • the electrical contact 708 may have a great enough width (e.g., a great enough width along a radius of the crystal 704) that the electrical contact 708 extends past the recessed ledge 712 in the housing member 714 when the crystal 704 is mounted to the housing member 714, making the electrical contact 708 accessible interior to the electronic device.
  • a flex circuit, other flexible conductor, or other conductive element may be soldered or otherwise electrically connected to the electrical contact 708, to enable a signal to be received from or applied to the electrode 700.
  • the electrode 718 may be a thin film electrode that is PVD deposited on a surface 720 of a crystal 722.
  • the surface 720 on which the electrode 718 is deposited may be a surface of the crystal 722 that is exterior to an electronic device (i.e ., the electrode 718 may be deposited on an exterior surface 720 of the crystal 722).
  • a thru-crystal via 724 may be drilled or otherwise cut into the crystal 722.
  • the thru-crystal via 724 may extend from the exterior surface 720 of the crystal 722 (or electrode 718) to the interior surface 726 of the crystal 722.
  • the via 724 may be coated or filled with a conductive material 728 such as stainless steel (SUS), and the conductive material 728 may be covered by, overlap, or otherwise electrically connect to the electrode 718.
  • the conductive material 728 in the via 724 may be molded or glued in the via 724.
  • the conductive material 728 may provide an electrical contact 730 on a surface 726 of the crystal 722 that is interior to an electronic device ⁇ i.e., on an interior surface of the crystal).
  • the conductive material 728 in the via 724 may overlap a portion of the interior surface 726 of the crystal 722, or may be connected to another conductive element deposited on the interior surface 726 of the crystal 722.
  • the conductive material(s) used to form the electrode 718 and deposited in the via 724 may be the same or different.
  • the conductive material(s) used to form the electrode 718 may include a layer of erbium.
  • the layer of erbium may or may not be coated with a layer of a stainless steel (SUS) or a layer of diamond like carbon (DLC).
  • the layer of erbium may be coated with a PVD deposited layer of Aluminum Titanium Nitride (AlTiN) or Chromium Silicon Carbon Nitride (CrSiCN).
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 726 of the crystal 722 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 732 in another housing member 734 of the electronic device ( e.g ., with the crystal 722 overlapping the housing member 734).
  • the crystal 722 may be attached to the housing member 734 using an adhesive 736, such as a HAF.
  • the adhesive 736, and the manner in which the crystal 722 is attached to the housing member 734, may therefore be selected to ensure adhesion of the crystal 722 to the housing member 734.
  • the via 724 may be positioned such that it overlaps the recessed ledge 732 or is interior to the recessed ledge 732, making the electrical contact 730 accessible interior to the electronic device.
  • a flex circuit, other flexible conductor, or other conductive element may be soldered or otherwise electrically connected to the electrical contact 730, to enable a signal to be received from or applied to the electrode 718.
  • the electrode 738 may be a metallic arc-shaped element mounted between a crystal 740 and another housing member 742 of an electronic device.
  • the electrode 738 may be a singular metallic ring-shaped electrode (e.g ., one electrode).
  • a peripheral band of a surface of the crystal 740 that is interior to the electronic device e.g., an interior surface 744 of the crystal 740
  • a peripheral band of a surface of the crystal 740 that is interior to the electronic device e.g., an interior surface 744 of the crystal 740
  • the electrode 738 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 750 in the housing member 742 (e.g., with the electrode 738 overlapping the housing member 742).
  • the electrode 738 may be arc shaped and may be one of two or more arc-shaped electrodes between the crystal 740 and the housing member 742.
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface of the crystal 740 may be mounted to recessed ledges 746 in multiple arc-shaped electrodes 738 (e.g., with the crystal 740 overlapping the electrodes 738), and each of the arc-shaped electrodes 738 may be mounted to the recessed ledge 750 in the housing member 742 (e.g., with the electrodes 738 overlapping the housing member 742).
  • the multiple arc-shaped electrodes 738 may be electrically isolated from each other by flexible seals or gaskets, or by rigid separators (e.g., rigid extensions of the housing member 742, which rigid extensions may include extensions of the recessed ledge 750 to which the electrodes 738 are mounted.
  • the electrode 738 may be mounted to the housing member 742 before the crystal 740 is mounted to the electrode 738.
  • the electrode 738 may be formed of a conductive material such as erbium.
  • the electrode 738 may be coated with a layer of stainless steel (SUS) or DLC.
  • the electrode may be formed of stainless steel (SUS) or DLC.
  • the layer of erbium may be coated with a PVD deposited layer of Aluminum Titanium Nitride (AlTiN) or Chromium Silicon Carbon Nitride (CrSiCN).
  • a surface 754 of the electrode 738 interior to the electronic device may provide an electrical contact for connecting components interior to the electronic device to the electrode 738.
  • an edge 756 or perimeter of the crystal 740 may be abutted directly to the electrode 738, and an edge 758 of the electrode 738 may be abutted directly to the housing member 742.
  • an adhesive, seal, gasket, or filler may fill a gap between the crystal 740 and the electrode 738 or a gap between the electrode 738 and the housing member 742.
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 744 of the crystal 740 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 746 in the electrode 738, and a peripheral band of an interior surface 754 of the electrode 738 may be mounted to the housing member 742.
  • the crystal 740 may be attached to the electrode 738 or the electrode 738 may be attached to the housing member 742 using an adhesive 748 or 752, such as a HAF.
  • the adhesive 748 or 752, and manner in which the respective elements are attached, may therefore be selected to ensure adhesion of the crystal 740 to the electrode 738 (or adhesion of the electrode 738 to the housing member 742).
  • the electrode 738 When the electrode 738 is mounted to the housing member 742, the electrode 738 may be positioned such that it overlaps the recessed ledge 750 or is interior to the recessed ledge 750, making the electrode 738 accessible interior to the electronic device.
  • a flex circuit, other flexible conductor, or other conductive element may be soldered or otherwise electrically connected to the electrode 738, to enable a signal to be received from or applied to the electrode 738.
  • FIGS. 8A-8D show alternative crystal profiles, and alternative attachments (e.g ., structurally attachments) of crystals to other housing members of an electronic device.
  • the crystals may have circular perimeters. In other examples, the crystals may have perimeters that are oval-shaped, square- shaped, rectangular-shaped, and so on.
  • the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 8A-8D can be applied to crystals having various perimeter shapes, to crystals having different compositions, and so on.
  • Each of FIGS. 8A-8D shows an exterior surface (e.g., a back surface) of an electronic device, such as a watch, and a cross- section of the exterior surface of the electronic device.
  • a crystal 800 is mounted to another housing member 802 of an electronic device.
  • the crystal 800 includes an exterior surface 804 that forms a part of the exterior surface of the electronic device, and an interior surface 806 that faces components interior to the electronic device.
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 806 of the crystal 800 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 864 in the housing member 802 (e.g., with the crystal 800 overlapping the housing member 802).
  • the crystal 800 may be attached to the housing member 802 using an adhesive, such as a HAF.
  • the adhesive, and the manner in which the crystal 800 is attached to the housing member 802 may be selected to ensure adhesion of the crystal 800 to the housing member 802.
  • the crystal 800 may be variously configured, but in FIG. 8A, an inner portion 808 of the interior surface 806 of the crystal 800, such as a portion of the crystal interior to a number of thru-crystal vias 810, is flat. An outer portion 812 of the interior surface 806, such as a portion outside the number of thru-crystal vias 810, is concave or inwardly- sloped (downwardly- sloped in the figure) with respect to the inner portion 808 of the interior surface 806. In contrast, the exterior surface 804 of the crystal 800 may be convex. Thus, the thickness of the crystal 800 may vary to some degree from its center axis to its perimeter.
  • one or more arc-shaped electrodes 814 may be positioned around the exterior surface 804 of the crystal 800, inward from the perimeter of the crystal 800. In other embodiments, the electrodes 814 may have other shapes or may extend to or around the perimeter.
  • the electrodes 814 may be PVD deposited thin film electrodes.
  • the electrodes 814 may be connected to interior components of the electronic device by the thru-crystal vias 810, which in some cases may be drilled or formed through the flat inner portion 808 of the interior surface 806 of the crystal 800. In other cases, the electrodes 814 may be connected to interior components of the electronic device by conductive material that wraps around the edge or perimeter of the crystal 800, or in any of the ways shown in FIGS. 7A-7C.
  • components such as a sensor subsystem may be mounted to the inner, flat portion of the interior surface 806 of the crystal 800.
  • a crystal 816 is mounted to another housing member 818 of an electronic device.
  • the crystal 816 includes an exterior surface 820 that forms a part of the exterior surface of the electronic device, and an interior surface 822 that faces components interior to the electronic device.
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 822 of the crystal 816 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 824 in the housing member 818 (e.g., with the crystal 816 overlapping the housing member 818).
  • the crystal 816 may be attached to the housing member 818 using an adhesive, such as a HAF.
  • the adhesive, and the manner in which the crystal 816 is attached to the housing member 818, may be selected to ensure adhesion of the crystal 816 to the housing member 818.
  • the crystal 816 may be variously configured, but in FIG. 8B, the crystal 816 has a uniform thickness.
  • the interior surface 822 of the crystal 816 may be concave, and the exterior surface 820 of the crystal 816 may be convex. To provide a flat surface for mounting
  • a secondary crystal 826 having a convex exterior surface 828 and a flat interior surface 866 may be mounted to an inner portion of the interior surface 822 of the crystal 816.
  • the secondary (or interior) crystal 826 may be mounted to the primary (or exterior) crystal 816 using a transparent adhesive. In some cases, the secondary crystal 826 may be mounted to the primary crystal 816 interior to a number of thru- crystal vias 830.
  • one or more arc-shaped electrodes 832 may be positioned around the exterior surface of the crystal 816, inward from the perimeter of the crystal 816. In other embodiments, the electrodes 832 may have other shapes or may extend to or around the perimeter.
  • the electrodes 832 may be PVD deposited thin film electrodes.
  • the electrodes 832 may be connected to interior components of the electronic device by the thru-crystal vias 830. In other cases, the electrodes 832 may be connected to interior components of the electronic device by conductive material that wraps around the edge or perimeter of the crystal 816, or in any of the ways shown in FIGS. 7A-7C.
  • FIGS. 8C and 8D each show a crystal mounted to another housing member of an electronic device.
  • the crystal includes an exterior surface that forms a part of the exterior surface of the electronic device, and an interior surface that faces components interior to the electronic device.
  • the crystal is has a flat interior surface and a convex exterior surface.
  • the crystals shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D may be easier to manufacture than the crystals shown in FIGS. 8 A and 8B.
  • a crystal 834 is mounted to another housing member 836 of an electronic device.
  • the crystal 834 includes an exterior surface 838 that forms a part of the exterior surface of the electronic device, and an interior surface 840 that faces components interior to the electronic device.
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 840 of the crystal 834 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 842 in the housing member ( e.g ., with the crystal 834 overlapping the housing member 836).
  • the crystal 834 may be attached to the housing member 836 using an adhesive, such as a HAF.
  • the adhesive, and the manner in which the crystal 834 is attached to the housing member 836, may be selected to ensure adhesion of the crystal 834 to the housing member 836.
  • one or more arc-shaped electrodes 844 may be positioned around the perimeter of the exterior surface 838 of the crystal 834.
  • the electrodes 844 may have other shapes or other positions on the exterior surface 838 of the crystal 834.
  • the electrodes 844 may be PVD deposited thin film electrodes.
  • the electrodes 844 may be connected to interior components of the electronic device by conductive material that wraps around the edge or perimeter of the crystal 834, or in any of the ways shown in FIGS. 7A-7C.
  • components such as a sensor subsystem may be mounted to the interior surface 840 of the crystal 834.
  • a crystal 860 is mounted to another housing member 846 of an electronic device, similarly to how the crystal 834 is mounted to another housing member 836 in FIG. 8C.
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 848 of the crystal 860 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 850 in the housing member 846 (e.g., with the crystal 860 overlapping the housing member 846).
  • the crystal 860 may be attached to the housing member 846 using an adhesive, such as a HAF.
  • the adhesive, and the manner in which the crystal 860 is attached to the housing member 846, may be selected to ensure adhesion of the crystal 860 to the housing member 846.
  • the housing member 846 to which the crystal 860 is mounted may be mounted to yet another housing member (e.g ., a second housing member 852).
  • a peripheral band of the interior surface 854 of the first housing member 846 may be mounted to a recessed ledge 856 in the second housing member 852 (e.g., with the first housing member 846 overlapping the second housing member 852).
  • the first housing member 846 may be attached to the second housing member 852 using an adhesive, such as a HAF.
  • the adhesive, and the manner in which the first housing member 846 is attached to the second housing member 852 may be selected to ensure adhesion of the first housing member 846 to the second housing member 852.
  • the first housing member 846 may electrically insulate the electrodes 858 on the crystal 860 from the second housing member 852, or may provide a transition between incompatible materials, or may provide a carrier for the crystal 860, or may facilitate assembly of the housing of the electronic device.
  • one or more arc-shaped electrodes 858 may be positioned around the perimeter of the exterior surface of the crystal 860.
  • the electrodes 858 may have other shapes or other positions on the exterior surface 862 of the crystal 860.
  • the electrodes 858 may be PVD deposited thin film electrodes.
  • the electrodes 858 may be connected to interior components of the electronic device by conductive material that wraps around the edge or perimeter of the crystal, or in any of the ways shown in FIGS. 7A-7C.
  • components such as a sensor subsystem may be mounted to the interior surface 848 of the crystal 860.
  • FIG. 9 shows the exterior surfaces (e.g., the skin-facing surfaces) of the back side housing member 202 and crystal 204 shown in FIG. 2, with masks and electrodes applied to the crystal 204 as described with reference to FIGS. 3A-3E, 4, 5, and 7A-7C.
  • the exterior surface of the crystal 204 may have a first electrode 242a and a second electrode 242b that are PVD deposited thereon.
  • the first and second electrodes 242a, 242b may be arc-shaped ( e.g ., semi-circle-shaped), and may be positioned around the central aperture 226 and set of apertures 230 formed in the masks represented by mask 224 (shown in FIG. 2).
  • the first and second electrodes 242a, 242b may extend to the edge of the crystal 204, and in some cases may wrap around the perimeter of the crystal 204 to the interior surface of the crystal 204, or be connected to conductive vias formed in the crystal 204, or otherwise electrically connect to elements within a watch body that apply a signal to, or receive a signal sensed by, one or both of the first and second electrodes 242a, 242b.
  • the first and second electrodes 242a, 242b may be electrically insulated from the back side housing member 202 (e.g., by a non-conductive gasket or adhesive), or the back side housing member 202 may be non-conductive.
  • the first and second electrodes 242a, 242b may be formed of, or include, erbium.
  • FIG. 10 shows the sensor subsystem 216 of FIG. 2 mounted on the crystal shown in FIG. 2.
  • FIG. 10 also shows a flex circuit 1000, surrounding the sensor subsystem 216, which may provide electrical connections between the electrodes 242 and the sensor subsystem 216 while also providing a ground that operates as an electrical noise mitigation barrier (or E-shield) between the sensor subsystem 216 and the electrodes 242.
  • the electrodes 242 are not shown in FIG. 10, but are connected to the electrical contacts 1002, which electrical contacts 1002 are on the interior surface of the crystal 204 and connected to both traces in the flex circuit 1000 and the electrodes 242 (which are on the exterior surface of the crystal 204).
  • Traces in the flex circuit 1000 may be connected to the electrical contacts 1002 via a conductive epoxy, and may connect the electrical contacts 1002 to the sensor subsystem 216.
  • a processor 1004 may be part of the sensor subsystem 216, and the processor 1004 may be connected to another processor or other circuitry via a flex circuit 1006.
  • FIGS. 11 and 12 there is shown an example of a crown assembly 1100, as may be provided in a watch body as shown in FIG. 1B.
  • FIG. 11 shows an exploded view of the crown assembly 1100
  • FIG. 12 shows an assembled cross-section of the crown assembly 1100, as viewed from the front or rear face of a watch body.
  • the crown assembly 1100 may include a conductive rotatable shaft 1102 configured to extend through an aperture in a housing 1200, such as the housing described with reference to FIG. 1B.
  • a user-rotatable crown 1104 may be mechanically connected ( i.e ., attached) to the shaft 1102 exterior to the housing 1200.
  • the crown 1104 may be rotated by a user of an electronic device, to in turn rotate the shaft 1102. In some cases, the crown 1104 may also be pulled or pushed by the user to translate the shaft 1102 along its axis.
  • the crown 1104 may be electrically connected to a circuit within the housing 1200, but electrically isolated from the housing 1200.
  • the crown 1104 may be electrically connected to the shaft 1102.
  • at least part of the crown 1104 and at least part of the shaft 1102 may be molded, machined, or otherwise formed together (e.g., from a same material, such as a conductive ceramic or stainless steel).
  • the crown 1104 may be formed of a conductive ceramic or stainless steel (or have a conductive ceramic or stainless steel core).
  • the core may be coated in a PVD deposited layer of erbium, which core and/or layer of erbium functions as an electrode.
  • the crown 1104 may have a conductive center portion 1202 surrounded by a ring 1204 of non-conductive material (or other insulator).
  • the non-conductive ring 1204 may help prevent shorting of the crown 1104 to the housing 1200.
  • the ring 1204 of non-conductive material may in some cases be surrounded by another ring 1206 of conductive material.
  • the crown 1104 may have a conductive surface covered by a thin non-conductive coating.
  • the non-conductive coating may provide a dielectric for capacitive coupling between the conductive surface and skin of a user of the crown 1104 (or an electronic device that includes the crown assembly 1100).
  • the crown 1104 may have a non-conductive coating on a surface of the crown 1104 facing the housing 1200.
  • a shaft retainer 1106 may be mechanically connected to the shaft 1102, interior to the housing 1200 (e.g., interior to a watch body housing), after the shaft is inserted through the aperture in the housing 1200 with the crown 1104 positioned exterior to the housing 1200.
  • the shaft retainer 1106 may include a nut, and the shaft 1102 may have a threaded male portion that engages a threaded female portion of the nut.
  • the shaft retainer 1106 may be conductive, or have a conductive coating thereon, and mechanical connection of the shaft retainer 1106 to the shaft 1102 may form an electrical connection between the shaft retainer 1106 and the shaft 1102.
  • the shaft retainer 1106 may be integrally formed with the shaft 1102, and the shaft 1102 may be inserted through the aperture in the housing 1200 from inside the housing 1200 and then attached to the crown 1104 ( e.g ., the crown 1104 may screw onto the shaft 1102).
  • a collar 1108 may be aligned with the aperture in the housing 1200, and a collar retainer 1110 may be coupled to the collar 1108 to retain the collar 1108 to the housing 1200 from a side of the housing 1200 opposite a side of the housing 1200 in which the collar 1108 is inserted.
  • the collar retainer 1110 may be coupled to the collar 1108 via threads on a male portion of the collar 1108 and corresponding threads on a female portion of the collar retainer 1110.
  • a gasket 1112 (e.g., an I-ring) made of a synthetic rubber and fluoropolymer elastomer (e.g., Viton), silicone, or another compressible material may be placed over the collar 1108 prior to insertion of the collar 1108 through the aperture, and attachment of the collar retainer 1110 to the collar 1108 may compress the gasket 1112.
  • the compressed gasket 1112 may provide stability to the collar 1108 and collar retainer 1110, or provide a moisture barrier between the collar 1108 and the housing 1200.
  • the collar 1108 and collar retainer 1110 may be attached to one another, and thereby to the housing 1200, prior to insertion of the shaft 1102 through the collar 1108.
  • Another gasket 1114 (e.g., a Y-ring) made of Viton, silicone, or another compressible material may be placed over the collar 1108, before or after insertion of the collar 1108 through the aperture, but before the shaft 1102 is inserted through the collar 1108.
  • the second gasket 1114 may provide a moisture barrier between the crown 1104 and the housing 1200 or the crown 1104 and the collar 1108.
  • an insulator 1116 may be inserted into or deposited on the interior of the collar 1108, or placed around or deposited on the shaft 1102.
  • the insulator 1116 may also be inserted, placed, or deposited as the shaft 1102 is inserted into the collar 1108.
  • the insulator 1116 may include a non-conductive sleeve or bushing (e.g., a plastic sleeve) inserted (e.g., press-fit) into the collar 1108 (e.g., into a portion of the collar 1108 positioned interior to the housing 1200).
  • the insulator 1116 may also or alternatively include a non-conductive sleeve over-molded on the collar (e.g., molded within the aperture in the collar 1108 and over a surface of the collar 1108 facing the crown 1104).
  • the insulator 1116 may also or alternatively include a non-conductive coating on the collar 1108 ( e.g ., on an inner surface of the collar 1108), or a non-conductive coating on the shaft 1102, or a set of one or more non-conductive gaskets surrounding the shaft 1102.
  • the insulator 1116 may be positioned between the shaft 1102 and the collar 1108 and help to insulate a conductive portion of the shaft 1102 (or the entire shaft 1102) from the collar 1108.
  • Another insulator 1118 may be positioned between the shaft retainer 1106 and the collar retainer 1110.
  • a non-conductive (e.g., plastic) washer, plate, or shim may be attached to the interior of the collar retainer 1110, between the shaft retainer 1106 and the collar retainer 1110.
  • the non-conductive washer may be carried by a plate 1120, such as a plate formed of stainless steel.
  • the non-conductive washer may be mounted to the interior of the collar retainer 1110 by welding (e.g., laser welding) the plate 1120 to the collar retainer 1110.
  • the non-conductive washer or other element may provide a bearing surface for the shaft retainer 1106.
  • one or more O-rings 1122, 1124 or other gaskets may be placed over the shaft 1102 before the shaft 1102 is inserted into the collar 1108.
  • the O-rings 1122, 1124 may be formed of a synthetic rubber and fluoropolymer elastomer, silicone, or another compressible material. In some cases, the O-rings 1122, 1124 may provide a seal between the shaft 1102 and the collar 1108.
  • the O-rings 1122, 1124 may also function as an insulator between the shaft 1102 and the collar 1108. In some embodiments, the O-rings 1122,
  • a low-friction ring 1208 or filler may be placed around the top of the collar 1108, between the crown 1104 and the collar 1108.
  • the low-friction ring 1208 or filler may be attached to the crown 1104, between the crown 1104 and the collar 1108.
  • the shaft 1102 may be smooth (not shown) and rotate within a thicker or closer fitting insulator 1116 without use of the O-rings 1122, 1124.
  • a bracket 1126 may be attached (e.g., laser welded) to the collar retainer 1110 or another element within the housing 1200.
  • the bracket 1126 may support a spring-biased conductor 1128 and maintain the spring-biased conductor 1128 in mechanical and electrical contact with the shaft retainer 1106 (or in some cases with an end of the shaft 1102, such as when the shaft extends through the shaft retainer (not shown)).
  • the spring- biased conductor 1128 may include a shear plate that is spring-biased about an axis 1138, which axis 1138 is perpendicular to and radially outward from a second axis 1140 of the shaft 1102.
  • the shear plate is shown to be circular, although the shear plate could also have other shapes.
  • the surface of the shear plate that abuts the shaft retainer 1106 or shaft end may be hardened ( e.g ., with a PVD deposited coating of cobalt chromium (CoCr or hard chromium)) to mitigate the likelihood of the shaft retainer 1106 or shaft end wearing through the shear plate after multiple rotations or translations of the shaft 1102.
  • the shear plate (and in some cases the entirety of the spring-biased conductor 1128) may be plated with gold or another material to improve electrical conductivity (e.g., prior to coating the shear plate with a hardener).
  • the spring-biased conductor 1128 may be formed (e.g., stamped or bent) from a piece of metal (e.g., stainless steel). In other cases, the spring-biased conductor 1128 may be formed in other ways.
  • the length and thickness of the shear plate, perpendicular to the axis of the shaft 1102, can be optimized to provide a balance between a high enough spring constant to ensure good electrical contact between the shear plate and the shaft retainer 1106 or shaft end (even during rotation of the shaft 1102), on one hand, and a low enough spring constant to mitigate the likelihood that the shaft retainer 1106 or shaft end will wear through the shear plate (or through a coating thereon).
  • a flat or relatively flat shear plate can reduce the dimension of the crown assembly 1100 along the axis 1140 of the shaft 1102.
  • a majority or entirety of the shaft 1102, shaft retainer 1106, or crown 1104 may be coated with a non-conductive coating, but for an external conductive surface of the crown 1104 and a portion of the shaft 1102 or shaft retainer 1106 that contacts the spring- biased conductor 1128.
  • the shaft 1102 When the shaft 1102 is translatable, translation of the shaft 1102 into the housing 1200 (e.g., into the housing of a watch body) may cause the spring-biased conductor 1128 (or the shear plate thereof) to deform. However, the spring bias of the spring -biased conductor 1128 may cause the spring-biased conductor 1128 (or the shear plate thereof) to maintain electrical contact with the shaft retainer or shaft end, regardless of whether the shaft 1102 is in a first position or a second position with reference to translation of the shaft 1102.
  • the spring-biased conductor 1128 may be electrically connected to a circuit, such as a circuit formed on or in a substrate 1130 such as a flex circuit or printed circuit board (PCB).
  • PCB printed circuit board
  • the spring- biased conductor 1128 may be surface-mounted to the circuit substrate 1130 (such as soldered or otherwise mechanically connected, for example by using a surface-mount technology process).
  • a conductive grease may be deposited between the shaft retainer 1106 or shaft 1102 and the shear plate or other member of the spring -biased conductor 1128.
  • the circuit may be in electrical communication with the crown 1104 via the spring -biased conductor 1128, the shaft retainer 1106, and the shaft 1102 (or when an end of the shaft 1102 protrudes through the shaft retainer 1106, the circuit may be in electrical communication with the crown 1104 via the spring-biased conductor 1128 and the shaft 1102).
  • a tactile (tac) switch 1210 such as a dome switch, may be electrically connected to the circuit and mechanically connected to the circuit substrate 1130.
  • the tac switch 1210 may be surface-mounted to the circuit substrate 1130 (such as soldered or otherwise mechanically connected).
  • the shear plate of the spring-biased conductor 1128 may be positioned between the shaft retainer 1106 and the tac switch 1210.
  • the tac switch 1210 may be operable responsive to translation of the shaft 1102.
  • the shaft 1102 may translate into the housing 1200 (e.g., into the housing of a watch body) and actuate the tac switch 1210, placing the tac switch 1210 in one of a number of states.
  • the tac switch 1210 may retain the state in which it was placed when pressed, or advance to another state, or toggle between two states, depending on the type or configuration of the tac switch 1210.
  • the circuit to which the tac switch 1210 and spring-biased conductor 1128 are electrically connected may be part of, or electrically connected to, one or more circuits that carry portions of an optical encoder 1132 and other circuit elements, such as an interface 1134 to the electrodes described with reference to FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A-7C, and 8A-8D, 9, and 10, or a processor that receives and processes signals received from or provided to the crown 1104 or other electrodes.
  • FIG. 11 shows a circuit 1136 (e.g., a flex circuit or PCB) to which a set of one or more light emitters and light detectors of an optical encoder 1132 is connected.
  • a circuit 1136 e.g., a flex circuit or PCB
  • the light emitter(s) may illuminate an encoder pattern or other rotating portion of the optical encoder 1132, which encoder pattern or other rotating portion of the optical encoder 1132 may be carried on (e.g., formed on, printed on, etc.) the shaft retainer 1106.
  • the light detector(s) may receive reflections of the light emitted by the light emitter(s), and a processor may determine a direction of rotation, speed of rotation, angular position, translation, or other state(s) of the crown 1104 and shaft 1102.
  • the spring-biased conductor 1128 may be connected to a processor.
  • the processor may be mounted or coupled to one or more of the circuits shown in FIG. 11.
  • the processor may determine whether a user is touching the crown 1104, or determine a biological parameter of the user based on a signal received from or provided to the user via the crown 1104, or determine other parameters based on signals received from or provided to the crown 1104.
  • the processor may operate the crown and electrodes described in FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A-7C, 8A-8D, and 9-12 as an electrocardiograph and provide an ECG to a user of a watch including the crown and electrodes.
  • the spring-biased conductor 1128 may include a conductive brush that is biased to contact a side of the shaft 1102 or a side of the shaft retainer 1106.
  • the conductive brush may maintain electrical contact with the shaft 1102 or shaft retainer 1106 through rotation or translation of the shaft 1102, and may be electrically connected to a circuit such as the circuit that supports the tac switch 1210.
  • FIG. 13 shows an elevation of a watch body 1300 capable of sensing a biological parameter.
  • the watch body 1300 may be an example of the watch body described with reference to FIG. 1B.
  • the watch body 1300 is defined by a housing 1302, and the housing 1302 may include a first crystal 1304 that is part of or a display or display cover, a second crystal 1306 having an exterior surface that supports one or more electrodes 1308 (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A-7C, 8A-8D, 9, and 10), one or more other housing members 1310 defining sidewalls of the watch body 1300, and a crown 1312.
  • a first crystal 1304 that is part of or a display or display cover
  • a second crystal 1306 having an exterior surface that supports one or more electrodes 1308 (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A-7C, 8A-8D, 9, and 10)
  • the watch body 1300 may be abutted to a user’s wrist 1314 or other body part, and may be adhered to the user by a watch band or other element (not shown).
  • the electrodes 1308 on the second crystal 1306 may contact the user’s skin.
  • the user may touch a conductive portion of the crown 1312 with a finger 1316.
  • the user may touch the crown 1312 in various ways, depending on where the crown 1312 is conductive, and depending on the user’s preference. In some cases, the user may touch the crown 1312 while also touching their wrist.
  • the intended signal path for acquiring an ECG is between one of the electrodes 1308 on the second crystal 1306 and the crown 1312 via both of the user’s arms and chest.
  • FIG. 14 shows a cross-section of the crown assembly 1100 shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, as viewed from an edge of a watch body ( e.g ., an edge to which a watch band might be attached).
  • the crown assembly 1100 shown in FIG. 14 differs from the crown assembly shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 in that the crown 1104 has a somewhat different configuration.
  • the crown 1104 has a conductive center portion 1400 surrounded by a non-conductive ring 1402.
  • the non- conductive ring may be attached to the conductive center portion 1400 by an adhesive 1404.
  • the crown assembly 1100 may be positioned adjacent a crystal 1406 under which a display may be mounted.
  • the display may be a touch- sensitive display.
  • the display may also be a force- sensitive display.
  • FIG. 14 shows one example of a force sensor 1408 for a force-sensitive display, in which a
  • compressible gasket 1410 is bounded by first and second capacitive plates 1412, 1414 and positioned between the crystal 1406 and the housing 1200.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic 1500 of an electronic device that may be used for acquiring an ECG or other biological parameter from a user of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may include a watch body.
  • the electronic device may include a first electrode 1502 on a crystal 1504, an optional second electrode 1506 on the crystal 1504, and a third electrode 1508 on the surface of a user-rotatable crown 1510.
  • the third electrode 1508 may be operable to be contacted by a finger of a user while the first electrode 1502 (and optional second electrode 1506) are positioned against a user’s skin (e.g., against the wrist of the user).
  • a processor 1512 which in some cases may be provided in an integrated circuit (IC), an IC card
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • SIP system in package
  • SOC system on a chip
  • voltages may be sensed at just the first and third electrodes 1502, 1508.
  • the second electrode 1506 may be grounded to the electronic device, thereby the user to the electronic device, and the voltage at the second electrode 1506 (i.e ., the ground voltage) may be used to remove noise generated by the electronic device or other environmental sources from the signals measured at the first and third electrodes 1502, 1508. This may result in more accurate readings (or processing) of the first and third voltages.
  • a signal or voltages at the first electrode 1502 may be amplified by a first amplifier 1514, and a signal or voltages at the third electrode 1508 may be amplified by a second amplifier 1516.
  • FIG. 16 shows an example method 1600 of determining a biological parameter of a user wearing a watch or other wearable electronic device, such as a watch or wearable electronic device described herein.
  • a ground voltage is optionally applied to a user via a first electrode on the electronic device.
  • the first electrode may be on an exterior surface of a crystal that forms part of a housing of the electronic device.
  • the operation(s) at 1602 may be performed, for example, by the processor described with reference to FIG. 15, using one of the electrodes described with reference to FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A-7C, 8A-D, 9, 10, and 15.
  • a first voltage or signal is sensed at a second electrode on the electronic device.
  • the second electrode may also be on the exterior surface of the crystal.
  • the operation(s) at 1604 may be performed, for example, by the processor described with reference to FIG. 15, using one of the electrodes described with reference to FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A-7C, 8A-D, 9, 10, and 15.
  • a second voltage or signal is sensed at a third electrode on the electronic device.
  • the third electrode may also be on a user-rotatable crown of the electronic device, on a button of the electronic device, or on another surface of the housing of the electronic device.
  • the ground voltage is applied and the first voltage or signal is sensed on a wrist of one arm of the user, and the second voltage or signal is sensed on a fingertip of the user (with the fingertip belonging to a finger on a hand on the other arm of the user).
  • the operation(s) at 1606 may be performed, for example, by the processor described with reference to FIG. 15, using one of the electrodes described with reference to FIGS. 3C, 3D, 3E, 4-6, 7A- 7C, 8A-D, 9, 10, and 15.
  • the biological parameter of the user may be determined from the optional ground voltage, the first voltage or signal, and the second voltage or signal.
  • the ground voltage may provide a reference for the first and second voltages or signals, or may otherwise be used to reject noise from the first and second voltages or signals.
  • the biological parameter may be an echocardiogram for the user.
  • the operation(s) at 1608 may be performed, for example, by the processor described with reference to FIG. 15.
  • FIG. 17 shows a sample electrical block diagram of an electronic device 1700, which electronic device may in some cases take the form of any of the watches or other wearable electronic devices described with reference to FIGS. 1-15, or other portable or wearable electronic devices.
  • the electronic device 1700 can include a display 1705 (e.g., a light-emitting display), a processor 1710, a power source 1715, a memory 1720 or storage device, a sensor 1725, and an input/output (I/O) mechanism 1730 (e.g., an input/output device, input/output port, or haptic input/output interface).
  • the processor 1710 can control some or all of the operations of the electronic device 1700.
  • the processor 1710 can communicate, either directly or indirectly, with some or all of the components of the electronic device 1700.
  • a system bus or other communication mechanism 1735 can provide communication between the processor 1710, the power source 1715, the memory 1720, the sensor 1725, and the input/output mechanism 1730.
  • the processor 1710 can be implemented as any electronic device capable of processing, receiving, or transmitting data or instructions.
  • the processor 1710 can be a microprocessor, a central processing unit (CPU), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), or combinations of such devices.
  • the term“processor” is meant to encompass a single processor or processing unit, multiple processors, multiple processing units, or other suitably configured computing element or elements.
  • the components of the electronic device 1700 can be controlled by multiple processors. For example, select components of the electronic device 1700 (e.g ., a sensor 1725) may be controlled by a first processor and other components of the electronic device 1700 (e.g., the display 1705) may be controlled by a second processor, where the first and second processors may or may not be in communication with each other.
  • the processor 1710 may determine a biological parameter of a user of the electronic device, such as an ECG for the user.
  • the power source 1715 can be implemented with any device capable of providing energy to the electronic device 1700.
  • the power source 1715 may be one or more batteries or rechargeable batteries.
  • the power source 1715 can be a power connector or power cord that connects the electronic device 1700 to another power source, such as a wall outlet.
  • the memory 1720 can store electronic data that can be used by the electronic device 1700.
  • the memory 1720 can store electrical data or content such as, for example, audio and video files, documents and applications, device settings and user preferences, timing signals, control signals, and data structures or databases.
  • the memory 1720 can be configured as any type of memory.
  • the memory 1720 can be implemented as random access memory, read-only memory, Flash memory, removable memory, other types of storage elements, or combinations of such devices.
  • the electronic device 1700 may also include one or more sensors 1725 positioned almost anywhere on the electronic device 1700.
  • the sensor(s) 1725 can be configured to sense one or more type of parameters, such as but not limited to, pressure, light, touch, heat, movement, relative motion, biometric data (e.g., biological parameters), and so on.
  • the sensor(s) 1725 may include a heat sensor, a position sensor, a light or optical sensor, an accelerometer, a pressure transducer, a gyroscope, a magnetometer, a health monitoring sensor, and so on.
  • the one or more sensors 1725 can utilize any suitable sensing technology, including, but not limited to, capacitive, ultrasonic, resistive, optical, ultrasound, piezoelectric, and thermal sensing technology.
  • the sensors 1725 may include one or more of the electrodes described herein (e.g ., one or more electrodes on an exterior surface of a crystal that forms part of a housing for the electronic device 1700 and/or an electrode on a crown, button, or other housing member of the electronic device).
  • the I/O mechanism 1730 can transmit and/or receive data from a user or another electronic device.
  • An I/O device can include a display, a touch sensing input surface, one or more buttons (e.g., a graphical user interface“home” button), one or more cameras, one or more microphones or speakers, one or more ports such as a microphone port, and/or a keyboard.
  • an I/O device or port can transmit electronic signals via a communications network, such as a wireless and/or wired network connection.
  • a communications network such as a wireless and/or wired network connection.
  • wireless and wired network connections include, but are not limited to, cellular, Wi-Fi,
  • An electronic device comprising:
  • a second electrode positioned to be contacted by a user of the electronic device while the first electrode is positioned against skin of the user
  • a processor operable to determine a biological parameter of the user based on voltages at the first electrode and the second electrode;
  • the voltages are measured while the user is in contact with the first electrode and the second electrode.
  • the crown assembly comprises:
  • a user-rotatable crown attached to the shaft exterior to the housing; and the second electrode comprises a surface of the user-rotatable crown.
  • the second electrode comprises a surface of the button.
  • the electronic device of claim 1 wherein the second electrode is formed on a non-crystal surface of the housing. 5. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein the first electrode wraps around an edge of the crystal and extends to the first surface.
  • the first electrode overlaps the ink mask
  • the ink mask is positioned between the first surface of the crystal and the first electrode.
  • the housing further comprises a housing member
  • the crystal overlaps the housing member
  • an adhesive attaches the crystal to the housing member.
  • An electronic watch comprising:
  • a crown assembly comprising:
  • a user-rotatable crown attached to the shaft exterior to the housing; a first electrode on the second surface of the crystal;
  • a second electrode on the second surface of the crystal; a third electrode on a surface of the user-rotatable crown, the third electrode positioned to be contacted by a finger of a user while the first electrode and the second electrode are positioned against a portion of the user;
  • a processor operable to determine an electrocardiogram of the user based on voltages at the first electrode, the second electrode, and the third electrode.
  • each of the first electrode and the second electrode is arc-shaped and positioned at a periphery of the crystal.
  • each of the first electrode and the second electrode wraps around an edge of the crystal to the first surface.
  • An electronic device comprising:
  • a crown mechanically and electrically connected to the shaft and exterior to the housing
  • a shaft retainer mechanically and electrically connected to the shaft and interior to the housing
  • the circuit is in electrical communication with the crown via the spring-biased conductor, the shaft retainer, and the shaft.
  • the crown has a conductive surface covered by a non-conductive coating, the non-conductive coating providing a dielectric for capacitive coupling between the crown and skin of a user of the electronic device.
  • the shaft is translatable
  • the spring-biased conductor comprises a shear plate biased to contact at least one of an end of the shaft or the shaft retainer;
  • the shear plate is deformable responsive to translation of the shaft; and the tactile switch is operable responsive to translation of the shaft.
  • the shaft is translatable
  • the spring-biased conductor comprises a conductive brush biased to contact at least one of a side of the shaft or the shaft retainer;
  • the tactile switch is operable responsive to translation of the shaft.
  • the circuit comprises a flex circuit
  • the spring-biased conductor is surface-mounted to the flex circuit.
  • An electronic device such as a watch, has a housing that includes a crystal.
  • the crystal has a first surface interior to the electronic device, and a second surface exterior to the electronic device.
  • One or more electrodes are deposited on the exterior surface of the crystal by physical vapor deposition (PVD).
  • PVD physical vapor deposition
  • An additional electrode is operable to be contacted by a finger of a user of the electronic device while the first electrode is positioned against skin of the user.
  • the additional electrode may be positioned on a user-rotatable crown of the electronic device, on a button of the electronic device, or on another surface of the housing of the electronic device.
  • a processor of the electronic device is operable to determine a biological parameter of the user based on voltages at the electrodes.
  • the biological parameter may be an echocardiogram.
  • FIG. 2 Title: WEARABLE DEVICE WITH ELECTRODES FOR SENS
  • FIG. 3E Title: WEARABLE DEVICE WITH ELECTRODES FOR SENS

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Primary Health Care (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Bioethics (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

La présente invention concerne de manière générale des interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé. Selon des modes de réalisation représentatifs, l'invention concerne des interfaces utilisateur pour une configuration initiale de surveillance de santé au moyen d'un premier dispositif électronique et d'un second dispositif électronique. Selon des modes de réalisation représentatifs, l'invention concerne des interfaces utilisateur pour enregistrer une information biométrique destinée à être utilisée en surveillance de la santé. Selon des modes de réalisation représentatifs, l'invention concerne des interfaces utilisateur pour utiliser un dispositif d'entrée tout en enregistrant une information biométrique pour une surveillance de la santé. Selon des modes de réalisation représentatifs, l'invention concerne des interfaces utilisateur pour visualiser et gérer des aspects de surveillance de santé.
EP19726205.8A 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé Withdrawn EP3596734A1 (fr)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP20180581.9A EP3734611A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé
EP22190169.7A EP4109470A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé
EP20180592.6A EP3734612B1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé

Applications Claiming Priority (13)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201862641994P 2018-03-12 2018-03-12
US201862643699P 2018-03-15 2018-03-15
US201862657881P 2018-04-15 2018-04-15
US201862657870P 2018-04-15 2018-04-15
DKPA201870602A DK180246B1 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-15 User interfaces for health monitoring
DKPA201870600A DK179980B1 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-15 USER INTERFACES FOR HEALTH MONITORING
DKPA201870601A DK180241B1 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-15 User interfaces for health monitoring
DKPA201870599A DK201870599A1 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-15 USER INTERFACES FOR HEALTH MONITORING
US16/144,030 US11039778B2 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-27 User interfaces for health monitoring
US16/143,997 US11202598B2 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-27 User interfaces for health monitoring
US16/143,909 US10624550B2 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-27 User interfaces for health monitoring
US16/143,959 US10568533B2 (en) 2018-03-12 2018-09-27 User interfaces for health monitoring
PCT/US2019/019694 WO2019177769A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé

Related Child Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP20180581.9A Division EP3734611A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé
EP20180592.6A Division EP3734612B1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé
EP22190169.7A Division EP4109470A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP3596734A1 true EP3596734A1 (fr) 2020-01-22

Family

ID=67906456

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP20180592.6A Active EP3734612B1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé
EP19726205.8A Withdrawn EP3596734A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé
EP20180581.9A Pending EP3734611A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP20180592.6A Active EP3734612B1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP20180581.9A Pending EP3734611A1 (fr) 2018-03-12 2019-02-26 Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (3) EP3734612B1 (fr)
CN (4) CN110729048B (fr)
WO (1) WO2019177769A1 (fr)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DK201870599A1 (en) 2018-03-12 2019-10-16 Apple Inc. USER INTERFACES FOR HEALTH MONITORING
WO2021051121A1 (fr) 2019-09-09 2021-03-18 Apple Inc. Interfaces utilisateur d'étude de recherche
CN111613333A (zh) * 2020-05-29 2020-09-01 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 自助健康检测方法、装置、存储介质及移动终端
EP4143772A1 (fr) * 2020-06-02 2023-03-08 Apple Inc. Interfaces utilisateur pour le suivi d'événements d'activité physique
KR20220012116A (ko) 2020-07-22 2022-02-03 삼성전자주식회사 전자 장치 및 전자 장치에 포함된 전극
CN113486631B (zh) * 2021-05-27 2023-04-21 四川大学华西医院 一种评估内容的记录方法及装置
US11846971B2 (en) * 2021-10-27 2023-12-19 International Business Machines Corporation Unexpected device usage detection and adaptation

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016164475A1 (fr) * 2015-04-09 2016-10-13 Apple Inc. Système tutoriel à deux dispositifs
WO2017062621A1 (fr) * 2015-10-06 2017-04-13 Berardinelli Raymond A Dispositif et procédé pour montre intelligente

Family Cites Families (39)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3859005A (en) 1973-08-13 1975-01-07 Albert L Huebner Erosion reduction in wet turbines
US4826405A (en) 1985-10-15 1989-05-02 Aeroquip Corporation Fan blade fabrication system
IL137478A (en) 1998-01-26 2005-11-20 Westerman Wayne Method and apparatus for integrating manual input
US7688306B2 (en) 2000-10-02 2010-03-30 Apple Inc. Methods and apparatuses for operating a portable device based on an accelerometer
US7218226B2 (en) 2004-03-01 2007-05-15 Apple Inc. Acceleration-based theft detection system for portable electronic devices
US6677932B1 (en) 2001-01-28 2004-01-13 Finger Works, Inc. System and method for recognizing touch typing under limited tactile feedback conditions
US6570557B1 (en) 2001-02-10 2003-05-27 Finger Works, Inc. Multi-touch system and method for emulating modifier keys via fingertip chords
US7657849B2 (en) 2005-12-23 2010-02-02 Apple Inc. Unlocking a device by performing gestures on an unlock image
US20090259134A1 (en) * 2008-04-12 2009-10-15 Levine Glenn N Symptom recording patient interface system for a portable heart monitor
US8320871B2 (en) * 2008-07-03 2012-11-27 Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc Emergency data message router database
US20160302666A1 (en) * 2010-07-30 2016-10-20 Fawzi Shaya System, method and apparatus for performing real-time virtual medical examinations
US20120029303A1 (en) * 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 Fawzi Shaya System, method and apparatus for performing real-time virtual medical examinations
US9310909B2 (en) * 2010-09-30 2016-04-12 Fitbit, Inc. Methods, systems and devices for physical contact activated display and navigation
KR101239348B1 (ko) * 2010-11-04 2013-03-06 김희곤 휴대용 맥박 측정기
CA2928172C (fr) * 2012-01-04 2019-07-09 Nike Innovate C.V. Montre d'athletisme
WO2013169849A2 (fr) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Industries Llc Yknots Dispositif, procédé et interface utilisateur graphique permettant d'afficher des objets d'interface utilisateur correspondant à une application
US9599632B2 (en) * 2012-06-22 2017-03-21 Fitbit, Inc. Fitness monitoring device with altimeter
JP6158947B2 (ja) 2012-12-29 2017-07-05 アップル インコーポレイテッド タッチ入力からディスプレイ出力への関係間を遷移するためのデバイス、方法及びグラフィカルユーザインタフェース
US20160132046A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2016-05-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling a process plant with wearable mobile control devices
US20150124067A1 (en) * 2013-11-04 2015-05-07 Xerox Corporation Physiological measurement obtained from video images captured by a camera of a handheld device
US9420956B2 (en) * 2013-12-12 2016-08-23 Alivecor, Inc. Methods and systems for arrhythmia tracking and scoring
CN104720765A (zh) * 2013-12-20 2015-06-24 西安丁子电子信息科技有限公司 一种人体健康监测及诊断的手机医疗装置
KR101933289B1 (ko) * 2014-04-01 2018-12-27 애플 인크. 링 컴퓨팅 디바이스를 위한 디바이스 및 방법
US20150297134A1 (en) * 2014-04-21 2015-10-22 Alivecor, Inc. Methods and systems for cardiac monitoring with mobile devices and accessories
US20160000379A1 (en) * 2014-07-01 2016-01-07 Vadim Ivanovich Pougatchev Method and apparatus for dynamic assessment and prognosis of the risks of developing pathological states
US10311211B2 (en) * 2014-09-18 2019-06-04 Preventice Solutions, Inc. Care plan administration using thresholds
JP2018503177A (ja) * 2014-12-04 2018-02-01 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェＫｏｎｉｎｋｌｉｊｋｅ Ｐｈｉｌｉｐｓ Ｎ．Ｖ． 家族歴に基づく動的なウェアラブルデバイス挙動
KR102348489B1 (ko) * 2015-02-26 2022-01-07 삼성전자주식회사 전자 장치 및 전자 장치에서 신체 측정 부위 자동 인식 가능한 체성분 측정 방법
WO2016151479A1 (fr) * 2015-03-24 2016-09-29 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Gestion intelligente d'alimentation de capteurs pour article vestimentaire de santé
BR112017027977B1 (pt) * 2015-06-22 2022-11-16 D-Heart S.r.l. Sistema eletrônico, método para controlar a aquisição de um eletrocardiograma e meios de armazenamento legíveis por computador
KR20170002035A (ko) * 2015-06-29 2017-01-06 엘지전자 주식회사 휴대용 기기 및 그의 체력 평가 방법
US10318958B2 (en) * 2015-07-28 2019-06-11 Jong Ho Kim Smart watch and operating method using the same
WO2017087642A1 (fr) * 2015-11-20 2017-05-26 PhysioWave, Inc. Procédés et appareils d'acquisition de paramètres sur la base d'une échelle
US20170293727A1 (en) * 2016-04-08 2017-10-12 Apple Inc. Intelligent blood pressure monitoring
US10252145B2 (en) * 2016-05-02 2019-04-09 Bao Tran Smart device
CN109922723A (zh) * 2016-08-31 2019-06-21 阿利弗克公司 用于生理监测的装置、系统和方法
CN106725384A (zh) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-31 北京工业大学 一种用于孕妇体征监测的智能手环系统
CN107591211A (zh) * 2017-09-15 2018-01-16 泾县麦蓝网络技术服务有限公司 基于移动终端控制的健康监护方法和系统
CN107713981A (zh) * 2017-10-09 2018-02-23 上海睦清视觉科技有限公司 一种ai眼科健康检测设备及其检测方法

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016164475A1 (fr) * 2015-04-09 2016-10-13 Apple Inc. Système tutoriel à deux dispositifs
WO2017062621A1 (fr) * 2015-10-06 2017-04-13 Berardinelli Raymond A Dispositif et procédé pour montre intelligente

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of WO2019177769A1 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110729048A (zh) 2020-01-24
CN110265131A (zh) 2019-09-20
EP3734612B1 (fr) 2022-09-28
EP3734611A1 (fr) 2020-11-04
CN112269617A (zh) 2021-01-26
WO2019177769A1 (fr) 2019-09-19
CN110729048B (zh) 2020-11-13
CN111920380A (zh) 2020-11-13
EP3734612A1 (fr) 2020-11-04
WO2019177769A4 (fr) 2019-12-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7248074B2 (ja) ヘルスモニタリングのためのユーザインタフェース
EP3734611A1 (fr) Interfaces utilisateur pour la surveillance de la santé
US20230101625A1 (en) User interfaces for health monitoring
AU2019100222B4 (en) User interfaces for health monitoring

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: UNKNOWN

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATION HAS BEEN MADE

PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20191015

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Extension state: BA ME

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS

17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20200626

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN WITHDRAWN

18W Application withdrawn

Effective date: 20210322